Toshiba Dvd Recorder Dr430 Owners Manual Use And Care

Owner’s Record

The model number and serial number are on the back

of this unit. Record these numbers in the spaces

below. Refer to these numbers whenever you

communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this unit.

Model number:

Serial number:

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

DVD VIDEO RECORDER

DR430KU

OWNER’S MANUAL

DR430KU

TOSHIBA DVD VIDEO RECORDER

*1VMN28958*

1VMN28958 / E7PEAUD

★★★★★

Printed in China

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_cover_EN.indd 2-3E7PEAUD_DR430KU_cover_EN.indd 2-3 2009/12/14 18:38:052009/12/14 18:38:05

2

EN

PRECAUTIONS

IMP

O

RTANT

S

AFETY IN

S

TRU

C

TI

O

N

S

1

.

Read

t

h

ese

in

st

r

uct

i

o

n

s.

2.

K

ee

p

t

h

ese instructions

.

3

.

H

ee

d

a

ll

warnings

.

4

.

Fo

ll

o

w

a

ll in

st

r

uct

i

o

n

s.

5.

D

o not use t

h

is apparatus near water

.

6

. C

l

ean on

l

y wit

h

d

ry c

l

ot

h.

7

.

D

o not block an

y

ventilation openings. Install in

acco

r

da

n

ce

wi

t

h

t

h

e

m

a

n

u

f

actu

r

e

r’

s

in

st

r

uct

i

o

n

s.

8.

D

o not install near an

y

heat sources such as radiators,

h

eat re

g

isters, stoves, or ot

h

er apparatus (inc

l

u

d

in

g

am

p

li

f

iers) that

p

roduce heat

.

9

.

D

o not de

f

eat the sa

f

ety purpose o

f

the polarized or

g

roun

d

ing-type p

l

ug. A po

l

arize

d

p

l

ug

h

as two

bl

a

d

es

wit

h

one wi

d

er t

h

an t

h

e ot

h

er. A groun

d

ing type p

l

ug

h

as two

bl

a

d

es an

d

a t

h

ir

d

groun

d

ing prong. T

h

e wi

d

e

blade or the third prong are provided

f

or your sa

f

ety. I

f

the provided plug does not

f

it into your outlet, consult

an electrician

f

or replacement o

f

the obsolete outlet

.

1

0.

Protect the power cord from bein

g

walked on

or pinched particularl

y

at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where the

y

exit from the

a

pp

aratus

.

11.

Onl

y

use attachments/accessories speci

f

ied b

y

the

manu

f

acturer

.

1

2

. Use on

l

y wit

h

t

h

e cart, stan

d

, tripo

d

,

b

rac

k

et, or

table speci

f

ied by the manu

f

acturer, or sold with

t

h

e apparatus. W

h

en a cart is use

d

, use

caution w

h

en moving t

h

e cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury

f

rom tip-over

.

1

3.

Unplu

g

this apparatus durin

g

li

g

htnin

g

storms or when unused for lon

g

periods

o

f

t

im

e.

14.

Re

f

er all servicin

g

to quali

f

ied service personnel.

Servicing is require

d

w

h

en t

h

e apparatus

h

as

b

een

d

amage

d

in an

y

wa

y

, suc

h

as power-supp

ly

cor

d

or

p

l

ug is

d

amage

d

,

l

iqui

d

h

as

b

een spi

ll

e

d

or o

b

jects

have

f

allen into the apparatus, the apparatus has

b

een expose

d

to rain or moisture,

d

oes not operate

norma

lly

, or

h

as

b

een

d

roppe

d.

A

dditional Sa

f

ety Instruction

s

1

5.

D

o not overload wall outlets; extension cords, or inte

g

ral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or

e

l

ect

ri

c

s

h

oc

k

.

1

6.

A

pparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no ob

j

ects

f

illed with liquids, such as vases, shall be

p

laced on the a

pp

aratus

.

17

.

K

eep your

f

ingers well clear o

f

the disc tray as it is closing. Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.

1

8.

Do not place a heav

y

object on or step on the apparatus. The object ma

y

fall, causing serious personal injur

y

and

serious dama

g

e to the apparatus.

19

.

Do not use a cracked , deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easil

y

broken and ma

y

cause serious personal

injur

y

and apparatus malfunction

.

20

.

If

the apparatus should smoke or smell, immediately disconnect the power cord

f

rom the wall outlet. Wait until the

smoke or smell stops, then ask your dealer

f

or a check and repair. Neglecting to do so may cause

f

ire.

21

.

While it is thunderin

g

, do not touch the connectin

g

cables or the apparatus.

22

.

Warning: To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames awa

y

from this product at all times.

23

.

D

isconnect the mains plug to shut o

ff

when

f

ind trouble or not in use. The mains plug shall remain readily operable

.

W

ARNIN

G:

TO

REDU

C

E THE RI

S

K

O

F FIRE

O

R ELE

C

TRI

C

S

H

OC

K

,

D

O

N

O

T EXP

OS

E THI

S

A

PPARAT

US

T

O

RAIN

O

R M

O

I

S

T

U

RE

.

C

A

U

TI

O

N

:

T

O REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

,

DO NO

T

REMOVE COVER

(

OR BACK

)

. NO USER SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

Q

UALIFIED

S

ERVI

C

E PER

SO

NNEL

.

C

A

U

TI

ON

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Th

e exc

l

amation point wit

h

in an equi

l

atera

l

triang

l

e is

i

ntended to alert the user to the presence o

f

important

o

perating an

d

maintenance (servicing) instructions in

t

h

e

l

iterature accompanying t

h

e app

l

iance.

T

he lightning

f

lash with arrowhead symbol, within an

e

qui

l

atera

l

trian

gl

e, is inten

d

e

d

to a

l

ert t

h

e user to t

h

e

presence of uninsulated “dan

g

erous volta

g

e” within the

product’s enclosure that may be o

f

su

ff

icient magnitude

t

o constitute a risk o

f

electric shock to persons.

T

he important note is located on the rear or bottom o

f

t

h

e ca

b

inet

.

T

he symbol

f

or CLASS ll (Double Insulation

)

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 2E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 2 2009/12/14 18:31:392009/12/14 18:31:39

3

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

PRECAUTIONS

T

his equipment ma

y

generate or use radio

f

requenc

y

energ

y

. Changes or modi

f

ications to this equipment ma

y

cause harm

f

ul inter

f

erence unless the modi

f

ications are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the

authority to operate this equipment i

f

an unauthorized change or modi

f

ication is made

.

R

ADI

O

-TV INTERFEREN

CE

T

his equipment has been tested and

f

ound to comply with the limits

f

or a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 o

f

the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harm

f

ul inter

f

erence in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

f

requency energy and, i

f

not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harm

f

ul inter

f

erence to radio communications. However,

t

here is no guarantee that inter

f

erence will not occur in a particular installation. I

f

this equipment does cause harm

f

ul

i

nter

f

erence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o

ff

and on, the user

i

s encouraged to try to correct the inter

f

erence by one or more o

f

the

f

ollowing measures

:

1

)

Reorient or re

l

ocate t

h

e receiving antenna.

2

)

Increase t

h

e separation

b

etween t

h

e equipment an

d

receiver.

3

)

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit di

ff

erent

f

rom that to which the receiver is connected

.

4

)

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician

f

or help

.

T

h

is C

l

ass B

d

igita

l

apparatus comp

l

ies wit

h

Cana

d

ian ICES-003

.

Cet a

pp

areil numéri

q

ue de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

ALWAYS plug the product into an outlet that is located in such a manner that it can be easily unplugged in

case t

h

e

p

ro

d

uct re

q

uires service

.

C

A

U

TI

O

N

:

Danger of explosion if batter

y

is incorrectl

y

replaced. Replace onl

y

with the same or equivalent t

y

pe.

W

ARNING

:

Batteries (Batter

y

pack or batter

y

installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like

.

L

A

S

ER

S

AFET

Y

T

his apparatus emplo

y

s a laser. Onl

y

a quali

f

ied service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this

apparatus,

d

ue to possi

bl

e e

y

e injur

y.

C

AUTI

O

N: Use o

f

controls or adjustments or per

f

ormance o

f

procedures other than those speci

f

ied herein may

resu

l

t in

h

azar

d

ous ra

d

iation exposure

.

C

AUTI

O

N: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlocks de

f

eated. Do not stare into beam.

L

OC

ATI

O

N

:

Insi

d

e, near t

h

e

d

ec

k

mec

h

anism

.

I

MP

O

RTANT

CO

PYRIGHT INF

O

RMATI

ON

U

nauthorized cop

y

ing, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This product incorporates

cop

y

right protection technolog

y

that is protected b

y

U.S. patents and other intellectual propert

y

rights. Use o

f

this

cop

y

right protection technolog

y

must be authorized b

y

Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited

viewing uses on

ly

un

l

ess ot

h

erwise aut

h

orize

d

by

Macrovision. Reverse engineering or

d

isassem

bly

is pro

h

i

b

ite

d.

Do not place the unit on the

f

urniture that is capable o

f

being tilted by a child and an adult leaning, pulling, standing

or climbing on it. A

f

alling unit can cause serious injury or even death

.

To Avoid the Hazards o

f

Electrical Shock and Fir

e

•

Do not handle the

p

ower cord with wet hands

.

•

Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it

f

rom an AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug

.

•

Do not put

y

our fingers or objects into the unit

.

Location and Handlin

g

•

Do not install the unit in direct sunlight, near strong magnetic

f

ields, or in a place subject to dust or strong vibration.

•

A

void a place with drastic temperature chan

g

es

.

•

Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place an

y

thing directl

y

on top or bottom o

f

the unit.

Depending on your external devices, noise or disturbance o

f

the picture and/or sound may be generated i

f

the unit is

p

l

ace

d

too c

l

ose to t

h

em. In t

h

is case, p

l

ease ensure enou

gh

space

b

etween t

h

e externa

l

d

evices an

d

t

h

e unit

.

•

Depending on the environment, the temperature o

f

this unit may increase slightly. This is not a mal

f

unction

.

•

Be sure to remove the disc and unplug the AC power cord from the outlet before carr

y

ing the unit.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 3E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 3 2009/12/14 18:31:432009/12/14 18:31:43

4

EN

PRECAUTIONS

T

Th

e unaut

h

orize

d

recor

d

in

g

, use,

d

istri

b

ution, or revision

o

f

television pro

g

rams, videotapes, DVDs and other

materials, is prohibited under the cop

y

right laws o

f

the

United States and other countries, and may subject you

y

to civi

l

an

d

/or crimina

l

ia

b

i

l

it

y.

Th

is remin

d

er is provi

d

e

d

to ca

ll

t

h

e ca

bl

e TV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 o

f

the National

Electrical Code, which provides guidelines

f

or proper

grounding - in particular, speci

f

ying that the cable

ground shall be connected to the grounding system o

f

the building, as close to the point o

f

cable entry as

possi

bl

e

.

For sa

f

ety and optimum per

f

ormance o

f

this unit

:

•

Install the unit in a horizontal and stable

p

osition. Do

not place an

y

thing directl

y

on top of the unit. Do not

place the unit directl

y

on top of the TV

.

•

Shield it

f

rom direct sunlight and keep it awa

y

f

rom

devices o

f

intense heat. Avoid dust

y

or humid places.

Avoid

p

laces with insu

ff

icient ventilation

f

or

p

ro

p

er

h

eat

d

issipation. Do not

bl

oc

k

t

h

e venti

l

ation

h

o

l

es on

the sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong

vibration or stron

g

ma

g

netic

f

ields

.

I

f

, b

y

accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug

t

h

e power cor

d

imme

d

iate

l

y an

d

ta

k

e t

h

e unit to our

Authorized Service Center

f

or servicing

.

Su

pp

lied Accessorie

s

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l wi

th

A

A (1.5 V) batter

y

x

2

I

n

sta

ll

at

i

o

n L

ocat

i

on

A

v

o

i

d

t

h

e

H

a

z

a

r

ds

o

f El

ect

ri

ca

l

S

h

oc

k

a

n

d

Fir

e

Ab

out Copyrig

ht

N

ote to CATV s

y

stem insta

ll

e

r

R

CA audio

/

video cables

o

wner’s manua

l

q

uic

k

setup gui

de

OWNER’S MANUAL

return sto

p

s

h

ee

t

D

ew Con

d

ensation Warnin

g

•

Dew condensation ma

y

f

orm inside the unit in the

f

ollowing conditions. I

f

so, do not use this unit at least

f

or a

f

ew

h

ours unti

l

its insi

d

e gets

d

r

y.

-

The unit is moved from a cold place to a warm place

.

-

Under conditions o

f

high humidit

y

.

-

A

f

ter heatin

g

a cold room

.

N

ote a

b

out Recyc

l

in

g

•

T

his unit’s packaging materials are rec

y

clable and can be reused. Please dispose o

f

an

y

materials in

a

ccor

d

ance wit

h

y

our

l

oca

l

rec

y

c

l

ing regu

l

ations

.

•

Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed o

f

in accordance with your local

regu

l

ations concerning c

h

emica

l

wastes

.

N

otice for Pro

g

ressive Scan Outpu

t

•

C

onsumers should note that not all high de

f

inition television sets are

f

ully compatible with this product and may

cause arti

f

acts to be displayed in the picture. In case o

f

picture problems with 525(480) progressive scan output,

i

t is recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard de

f

inition’ output. I

f

there are questions

regar

d

ing your TV set compati

b

i

l

ity wit

h

t

h

is 525p(480p) DVD recor

d

er, p

l

ease contact Tos

h

i

b

a Customer Service

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 4E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 4 2009/12/14 18:31:432009/12/14 18:31:43

5

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

PRECAUTIONS

Servicin

g

• Please refer to relevant to

p

ics on “TROUBLESHOOTING”

on pa

g

es 93-96 be

f

ore returnin

g

the product

.

• If

y

ou need to call a customer service representative,

please know the model number and serial number o

f

your product be

f

ore you call. This in

f

ormation is

displayed on the back o

f

the product. Also, please take

a moment to identi

f

y the problem you are having, and

be prepared to explain this to the representative. I

f

you

b

e

l

ieve t

h

e representative wi

ll

nee

d

to

h

e

l

p you wit

h

operations, p

l

ease stay near t

h

e pro

d

uct. Our

representatives wi

ll

b

e

h

appy to assist you

.

Cleanin

g

the Cabine

t

g

• Wi

p

e the front

p

anel and other exterior surfaces of the

unit with a soft, slightl

y

damp cloth

.

• Never use a so

l

vent

,

t

h

inner

,

b

enzene or a

l

co

h

o

l

to

clean the unit. Do not spra

y

insecticide liquid near the

unit. Such chemicals ma

y

discolor the surface or

dama

g

e the unit

.

C

l

eanin

g

Disc

s

g

• W

h

en a

d

isc

b

ecomes

d

irty, c

l

ean it wit

h

a c

l

eaning

cloth. Wipe the disc

f

rom the center to out. Do not

w

ipe in a circu

l

ar motion

.

• Do not use so

l

vents suc

h

as

b

enzine, t

h

inner,

commercia

ll

y avai

l

a

bl

e c

l

eaners,

d

etergent, a

b

rasive

cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended

f

or analog

recor

d

s

.

Cleanin

g

the Disc Lens

g

• If this unit still does not perform properl

y

although

y

ou

r

e

f

e

r

to

t

h

e

r

e

l

e

v

a

n

t

sect

i

o

n

s

a

n

d

to

“TROUBLESHOOTING” in this owner’s manual

,

the laser

optical pickup unit ma

y

be dirt

y

. Consult

y

our dealer or

an Authorized Service Center for ins

p

ection and

cleanin

g

of the laser optical pickup unit

.

Disc Han

dl

in

g

• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not

ad

h

e

r

e

to

t

h

e

su

r

faces

of

t

h

e

d

i

scs.

• A

l

ways store t

h

e

d

isc in its protective case w

h

en it is

n

ot

used.

M

ai

n

te

n

a

n

ce

If

the remote control does not work properly, you can test i

f

the remote control sends out the infrared signal with a

di

g

ital camera (includin

g

built-in camera o

f

cellular phone). It

will hel

p

to define the cause of malfunction

.

W

ith a di

g

ital camera (includin

g

built-in camera of

cellular

p

hone)

:

D

irect a di

g

ital camera to remote control, press

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

a

butto

n

o

n r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

.

If infr

a

r

ed

li

g

ht appears throu

g

h di

g

ital camera, the remote

control is workin

g.

IR Signa

l

C

h

ec

k

Do

lb

y Digita

l

Recor

d

in

g

“

Dolb

y

® Digital Recording enables consumers to record

h

igh-qualit

y

video with stereo sound on recordable DVD

d

iscs. The technolog

y

, when utilized instead of PCM

r

ecordin

g

, also saves recordable disc space, allowin

g

for

h

i

g

her video resolution or extended recordin

g

time on

e

ach DVD. DVDs created using Dolb

y

Digital Recording

w

ill pla

y

back on all DVD-video pla

y

ers.”

Note:

T

his is true when the pla

y

ers are compatible with

actua

l r

eco

r

dab

l

e

DVD

d

i

scs.

M

PEG La

y

er - 3 audio coding technolog

y

licensed from

F

r

au

nh

o

f

e

r II

S

a

n

d

Th

o

m

so

n

.

Manu

f

actured under license under U.S.

Patent #: 5,451,942 & ot

h

er U.S. an

d

wor

ld

wi

d

e patents issue

d

& pen

d

ing.

DTS an

d

t

h

e Sym

b

o

l

are registere

d

tra

d

emar

k

s an

d

DTS Digita

l

Out an

d

t

h

e

DTS logos are trademarks o

f

DTS, Inc.

Pr

oduct

in

c

l

udes

soft

w

a

r

e.

ll

Rig

h

ts Reserve

d.

Ma

n

u

f

actu

r

ed

u

n

de

r li

ce

n

se

fr

o

m

D

o

lby

La

b

oratories. Do

lby

an

d

t

h

e

d

ouble-D s

y

mbol are trademarks o

f

D

o

lby

La

b

oratories

.

HDMI, the HDMI Lo

g

o, and Hi

g

h

-

D

e

fini

t

i

o

n M

u

l

t

im

ed

i

a

In

te

rf

ace

a

re trademarks or re

g

istered

t

rademarks of HDMI Licensin

g

LL

C

in

t

h

e

U

ni

ted

States

a

n

d

ot

h

e

r

cou

n

t

ri

es.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 5E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 5 2009/12/14 18:31:452009/12/14 18:31:45

6

EN

CONTENTS

Introduction

P

RE

C

A

U

TI

O

N

S

.

2

F

EAT

U

RE

S

.

8

S

y

mbols Used in this Owner’s Manua

l

.

8

FU

N

C

TI

O

NAL

O

VERVIE

W

.

11

Installin

g

the Batteries in the Remote Contro

l

.

12

U

sin

g

a Remote Contro

l

.

12

GU

IDE T

O

N-

SC

REEN DI

S

PLAY

S

AND MEN

US

.

14

O

n-Screen Displa

y

/ Menu

.

14

M

a

in M

e

n

u

.

15

F

R

O

NT PANEL DI

S

PLAY G

U

ID

E

.

17

Connections

CO

NNE

C

TI

O

N

S

.

18

C

onnecting to an Externa

l

Tune

r

.

18

T

V

C

onnection

O

vervie

w

.

18

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

an HDM

I

C

ompati

bl

e Por

t

.

19

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

Component Vi

d

e

o

Input jac

ks

.

20

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

an S-Vi

d

eo Input Jac

k

.

20

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

Au

d

io / Vi

d

eo Input Jac

ks

.

2

1

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

out Au

d

io

Vi

d

eo Input Jac

ks

.

2

1

Digita

l

Au

d

io Connectio

n

.

22

Basic Setup

I

NITIAL

S

ETTIN

G

.

2

4

SETTING THE CLOCK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K

25

Cl

oc

k

Settin

g

.

2

5

S

ETTING

S

F

O

R THE VIDE

O

INPU

T

.

2

6

Disc Management

FO

RMATTING A DI

SC

.

27

C

hoosin

g

the Recordin

g

Format of a Brand-Ne

w

D

V

D

-R

W

.

27

Reformatting a Disc Manuall

y

.

28

S

ETTING A DI

SC

T

O

PR

O

TE

CT

.

29

P

LAYING THE DI

SCS

IN

O

THER DVD PLAYER

S

.

30

Auto Finalizin

g

.

30

Finalizin

g

a Dis

c

.

3

1

Recording

INF

O

RMATI

O

N

O

N DVD RE

CO

RDIN

G

.

33

Recordin

g

Mod

e

.

33

Restrictions on Recordin

g

.

33

S

ETTING

S

F

O

R A RE

CO

RDIN

G

.

34

Make Recordin

g

Compatibl

e

.

34

Settin

g

for Auto Chapte

r

.

34

Recordin

g

Audio Select (XP

)

.

35

Settin

g

Aspect Ratio for Video Mode Recordin

g

.

35

BA

S

I

C

RE

CO

RDING

&

O

NE-T

OUC

H TIMER RE

CO

RDIN

G

.

36

T

IMER RE

CO

RDIN

G

.

38

Hints for Timer Recordin

g

.

41

S

ATELLITE LIN

K

.

42

S

ETTING

S

F

O

R AN EXTERNAL DEVI

CE

.

4

3

Co

nn

ect

i

o

n

to

a

n Ex

te

rn

a

l D

e

vi

ce

.

4

3

Recordin

g

from an External Devic

e

.

44

DV D

U

BBIN

G

.

4

5

Guide to DV and On-Screen Displa

y

.

4

5

DVC to DVD Dubbin

g

.

4

6

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 6E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 6 2009/12/14 18:31:472009/12/14 18:31:47

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

CONTENTS

Playback

INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K

48

St

r

uctu

r

e

o

f Di

sc

Co

n

te

n

ts

.

48

BASIC PLAYBACK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K

49

Direct Playback

.

k

49

Pla

y

back from the Title Lis

t

.

50

Pla

y

ing Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R wit

h

MP3

/

JPEG file

s

.

51

Pla

y

ing Back a USB Device with MP3 / JPEG file

s

.

5

2

Usin

g

the Title/Disc Men

u

.

53

P

ause

.

53

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K

5

4

Resume Playback

.

k

54

Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback

.

k

5

4

Skipping TV Commercials During Pla

y

bac

k

.

5

4

Rapid Pla

y

bac

k

.

55

Step b

y

Step Pla

y

bac

k

.

55

S

l

ow Forwar

d

/ S

l

ow Reverse P

l

a

yb

ac

k

.

55

Zoom

.

56

Marker Settin

g

.

56

Chasing Pla

y

back during Recordin

g

.

5

7

Simultaneous Pla

y

back and Recordin

g

.

58

S

EAR

CH

.

5

9

T

itle/Cha

p

ter Searc

h

.

5

9

T

r

ac

k

Sea

r

ch

.

5

9

T

im

e

Sea

r

ch

.

60

R

EPEAT

/

RANDOM

/

PROGRAM PLAYBACK

/

S

LIDE

S

H

OW

.

6

1

Repeat Playback

.

k

6

1

Random Playback

.

k

6

1

Program Pla

y

bac

k

.

6

2

S

li

de

S

h

ow

.

6

2

S

ELE

C

TING THE F

O

RMAT

O

F A

U

DI

O

AND VIDE

O

.

63

Switchin

g

Subtitle

s

.

63

Switching Audio Soundtrack

.

k

63

Switching Virtual Surround S

y

ste

m

.

6

4

Switchin

g

Camera An

g

le

s

.

6

4

Reducin

g

Block Noise

.

6

4

A

d

j

usting Black Leve

l

.

65

Editing

I

NF

O

RMATI

O

N

O

N DI

SC

EDITIN

G

.

66

G

u

i

de

to

a

Ti

t

l

e

Li

st

.

66

Editin

g

Disc

s

.

66

D

ELETING TITLE

S

.

67

CREATING

/

DELETING PLAYLIS

T

.

69

Adding Titles to a Pla

y

list

.

69

Erasing All Pla

y

lis

t

.

7

0

E

DITING DI

SCS

.

71

Puttin

g

Names on Title

s

.

71

Settin

g

Chapter Mark

s

.

7

3

Hidin

g

Chapter

s

.

74

Deletin

g

a Part of a Titl

e

.

7

5

Dividin

g

a Title

.

77

Com

b

inin

g

Tit

l

e

s

.

7

8

Settin

g

or Releasin

g

the Title Protectio

n

.

7

9

Settin

g

or Clearin

g

All Chapter Marks at Onc

e

.

80

Function Setup

L

I

S

T

O

F THE DEFAULT

S

ETTING

S

.

81

GENERAL

S

ETTIN

G

.

83

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

83

Disp

l

a

y

.

87

V

i

d

e

o

.

89

H

D

M

I

.

90

Reset A

ll

.

92

Others

T

R

OU

BLE

S

H

OO

TIN

G

.

93

Frequentl

y

Asked Question

s

.

9

6

L

ANG

U

AGE

CO

D

E

.

97

GL

OSS

AR

Y

.

9

8

S

PE

C

IFI

C

ATI

O

N

S

.

99

L

IMITE

D

WARRANT

Y

.

1

00

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 7E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 7 2009/12/14 18:31:472009/12/14 18:31:47

8

EN

FEATURES

T

his unit not only plays back DVD and CD, but also o

ff

ers

f

eatures

f

or you to record on DVD and edit them a

f

ter that. The

f

ollowing

f

eatures are o

ff

ered with this unit

.

Th

is unit is compati

bl

e wit

h

recor

d

ing on DVD-RW/+RW

w

h

ic

h

is recor

d

a

bl

e repeate

dl

y an

d

DVD-R/+R w

h

ic

h

accept

the additional recordin

g

s until the disc becomes

f

ull but

not overwritable. You can choose either one

f

or your

c

onven

i

ence

.

Up to 12 program recor

d

ing

:

You can program t

h

e unit to recor

d

up to 12 programs,

wit

h

in a mont

h

in a

d

vance. Dai

l

y or wee

kl

y program

recor

d

ings are a

l

so avai

l

a

bl

e

.

One-touch timer recordin

g

(OTR)

:

You can easil

y

set a recording time as

y

ou prefer. Ever

y

time

[

REC

I

]

i

s pressed durin

g

recordin

g

, the recordin

g

time will

be increased b

y

30 minutes up to 8 hours. The recording

automaticall

y

stops when the recording time

y

ou set is

r

eac

h

ed.

DV

d

u

bb

in

g:

T

his

f

unction helps you to easily dub the contents o

f

the DVC

(

d

i

g

ita

l

vi

d

eo camcor

d

er) to DVD

.

Le

f

t channel stereo recording

:

T

his unit can record the sound o

f

the le

f

t channel monaural

input as le

f

t and right channels automatically (the input

f

rom the L2 jacks only).

A

utomatic chapter mark settin

g

:

Chapter marks will be put on recordings as

y

ou set before

attemptin

g

to record

.

A

utomatic tit

l

e menu ma

k

ing

:

T

he unit creates title menu automaticall

y

when

f

inalizing discs.

A

utomatic p

l

ay

l

ist ma

k

ing

:

T

he unit creates a playlist automatically a

f

ter recording VR

mo

d

e DVD-RW.

A

utomatic title finalizin

g:

For video mode DVD-RW/-R and DVD+R recording,

y

ou can

finalize discs automaticall

y

after finishing all timer recordings

or at the end of the disc space if

y

ou set this in the main menu.

R

ecordin

g

T

heater surround sound in

y

our home:

W

hen connectin

g

the unit to an amplifier or a decoder which is

c

ompatible with Dolb

y

Digital or DTS,

y

ou can experience the

theater surround sound from discs with surround sound s

y

stem

.

Q

uick search for what

y

ou want to watch

:

Y

ou can easil

y

find the part

y

ou want to watch using the

search function. Search for a desired point on a disc b

y

title,

c

hapter/track or time

.

Virtua

l

surroun

d

system

:

Y

ou can enjoy stereop

h

onic space t

h

roug

h

your existing 2

ch

anne

l

stereo system

.

P

la

y

ing back MP3/JPEG files

:

Y

ou can enjo

y

MP3/JPEG files which are recorded on

C

D-RW

/

-R or a USB device.

P

la

y

back

Available

f

or pla

y

ing back discs on a regular DVD pla

y

er:

Recor

d

e

d

iscs can

b

e p

l

aye

d

b

ac

k

on regu

l

ar DVD p

l

ayers,

inc

l

u

d

ing computer DVD

d

rives compati

bl

e wit

h

DVD-vi

d

eo

pla

y

back. Although DVD+RW/+R are pla

y

able on other units

without finalization in most cases

,

it is recommended to

finalize in order to stabilize the

p

erformance

.

Compatibilit

y

P

rogress

i

ve scan system

U

n

l

i

k

e conventiona

l

inter

l

ace scanning, t

h

e progressive scan

system provides less

f

lickering and images in higher

resolution than that o

f

traditional television signals

.

H

DMI (Hi

g

h-Definition Multimedia Interface

)

You can enjo

y

clearer audio/video output when connecting

this unit to a displa

y

device with an HDMI-compatible port.

Ot

h

er

s

Sy

mbols Used in this Owner’s Manua

l

T

o speci

fy

f

or what disc t

y

pe each

f

unction is, we put the

f

ollowing symbols at the beginning o

f

each item to operate

.

Symbol

For Recording, Playing Back, and Editing

For Playback only

Description

Description refers to DVD-RW in video mode

Description refers to DVD-R in video mode

Description refers to audio CD

Description refers to CD-RW/-R and USB device with MP3 les

Description refers to DVD-RW in VR mode

Description refers to CD-RW/-R and USB device with JPEG les

Description refers to DVD-video

Description refers to DVD+RW

Description refers to DVD+R

If you do not nd any of the symbols listed above under the

function heading, the operation is applicable to all media.

E

ditin

g

D

eletin

g

titles:

Y

ou can

d

e

l

ete tit

l

es w

h

ic

h

y

ou

d

o not nee

d

an

y

more

.

Setting or c

l

earing c

h

apter mar

k

s

:

Y

ou can set or c

l

ear c

h

apter mar

k

s on tit

l

es

.

H

idin

g

chapters

:

T

o keep others from pla

y

ing back some chapters without

permission,

y

ou can hide chapters

.

D

eletin

g

parts o

f

titles

:

Y

ou can delete a specific part of a title

.

D

ividin

g

or combinin

g

titles

:

You

ca

n

d

ivi

de

o

r

co

m

b

in

e

a

t

i

t

l

e.

Ed

iting tit

l

e names

:

Y

ou can change the title name

y

ou pre

f

er

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 8E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 8 2009/12/14 18:31:472009/12/14 18:31:47

9

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

FEATURES

Discs for Recording, Playing back

Disc type

D

V

D

-

RW

D

V

D

-

R

D

V

D

+

RW

D

V

D

+

R

Logo

Format

Ca

n

be

f

o

rm

atted

in VR

o

r vi

deo

mode

A

utomaticall

y

fo

rm

atted

in

v

i

deo

m

ode

Automaticall

y

f

o

rm

atted

in

+VR m

ode

Automaticall

y

f

o

rm

atted

in

+VR m

ode

Vi

deo

M

ode

VR M

ode

Icon

Maximum record

time

4

80 min

(

12cm

)

1

44 min

(

8cm

)

4

80 min

(

12cm

)

1

44 min

(

8cm

)

4

80 min

(

12cm

)

1

44 min

(

8cm

)

480 min

(

12cm

)

144 min

(

8cm

)

480 min

(

12cm

)

144 min

(

8cm

)

Disc Speed

Versions

1

X-

6X

V

er.1.1

/

1.

2

V

er.1.1/ 1.2 CPRM com

p

atibl

e

1

X-1

6X

V

er.2.0

/

2.1

1X

-

4X

1X-1

6X

Compatibility

Pla

y

able on

most

DVD

p

la

y

ers

.

Fin

a

liz

at

i

o

n

ecessar

y

.

(

title menu will

b

e created

)

P

la

y

able onl

y

o

n VR m

ode

c

om

p

atible unit.

F

in

a

liz

at

i

o

n

reco

mm

e

n

ded.

P

la

y

able on

most

DVD

p

la

y

ers

.

F

in

a

liz

at

i

o

n

ecessar

y

.

(

title menu will

b

e created

)

Pla

y

able on

D

V

D

+RW

com

p

atible

pla

y

ers.

Fin

a

liz

at

i

o

n

r

eco

mm

e

n

ded.

(

title menu will

be created

)

Pla

y

able on

m

ost

DVD

pla

y

ers.

Fin

a

liz

at

i

o

n

r

eco

mm

e

n

ded.

(

title menu will

be created

)

Available Features

Recordin

g

Feature

s

Record TV

programs

✓

Reuse by deleting

the current

contents

✓

Record 16:9 size

pictures

✓

Record copy-once

programs

✓

*

Create chapters

at fixed intervals

(auto chapter)

✓

E

d

itin

g

Feature

s

Playlist

Original

Scene delete

✓

Edit title name

✓

Create chapters

wherever you like

(chapter mark)

✓

Divide a title

✓

Combine titles

✓

Hide chapters

✓

Delete a title

✓

Create a

playlist

✓

Protect a title

✓

: Avai

l

a

bl

e Gray: Not avai

l

a

bl

e

*CPRM compati

bl

e

d

isc on

l

y

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 9E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 9 2009/12/14 18:31:482009/12/14 18:31:48

1

0

EN

Discs for playing back

Disc Type DVD-VIDE

O

C

D-D

A

C

D-R

W

C

D-R

Logo

Icon

Files for playing back

Type of title M

P3

JPE

G

Icon

Media

C

D-RW

/

-

R

US

B

de

vi

ce

C

D-RW

/

-

R

US

B

de

vi

ce

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

*

This unit cannot pla

y

back the disc contents protected

b

y

Windows Media Digital Rights Management (DRM)

.

DVD is recorded in di

ff

erent color s

y

stems throughout

t

h

e wor

ld

. T

h

e most common co

l

or s

y

stem is NTSC

(w

h

ic

h

is use

d

primari

l

y in t

h

e Unite

d

States an

d

Cana

d

a)

.

T

h

is unit uses NTSC, so DVD you p

l

ay

b

ac

k

must

b

e

recor

d

e

d

in t

h

e NTSC system. You cannot p

l

ay

b

ac

k

DVD

recor

d

e

d

in ot

h

er co

l

or s

y

stems

.

Co

l

or S

y

stem

s

Th

is unit

h

as

b

een

d

esigne

d

to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

DVD

w

ith region 1. DVD must be labeled

f

or ALL

regions or

f

or region 1 in order to play back on

th

e unit. You cannot p

l

ay

b

ac

k

DVD t

h

at are

labeled

f

or other regions. Look

f

or the symbols

o

n the right on your DVD. I

f

these region

sym

b

o

l

s

d

o not appear on your DVD, you cannot

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

t

h

e DVD in t

h

is unit

.

R

e

g

ion Co

d

es

• CD-ROM • Com

p

act Disc-Interactive (CD-I

)

• Vi

d

eo Sing

l

e Disc (VSD) • DVD-ROM

• DVD-audio • Un

f

inalized disc

•

DVD-RW/-R recorded in non compatible recordin

g

format

• B

l

u-ray Disc • HD DV

D

O

n the following disc, the sound ma

y

not be heard

.

• Super au

d

io CD - On

ly

t

h

e soun

d

on t

h

e CD

l

a

y

er can

b

e

h

ear

d

. T

h

e soun

d

on t

h

e

h

ig

h

-

d

ensity super au

d

io CD

l

ayer cannot

b

e

h

ear

d.

Unp

l

aya

bl

e Disc

s

T

he number inside the

g

lobe refers to re

g

ion of the world

.

A DVD labeled for a specific region can onl

y

pla

y

back on

the unit with the same re

g

ion code

.

• Toshiba is not liable for an

y

damage or loss caused directl

y

or indirectl

y

b

y

the malfunction of this recorder, including,

without limitation, an

y

one o

f

the

f

ollowing

:

• Fai

l

ure to recor

d

contents inten

d

e

d

to

b

e recor

d

e

d

b

y

th

e consumer

.

• Failure to edit contents as intended b

y

the consumer.

• When a DVD-RW/-R

,

DVD+RW/+R disc created on this

r

ecorder is used (e.g., insertion, pla

y

back, recording or

e

diting) in another DVD pla

y

er, recorder or personal

c

om

p

uter drive

.

• W

h

en a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R

d

isc t

h

at is use

d

in

th

e manner

d

escri

b

e

d

in t

h

e imme

d

iate

l

y prece

d

ing

b

u

ll

et point is use

d

again in t

h

is recor

d

er

.

• W

h

en a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R

d

isc t

h

at was

r

ecor

d

e

d

in anot

h

er DVD recor

d

er, or in a persona

l

c

omputer

d

rive is use

d

in t

h

is recor

d

er

.

• Some functions ma

y

not work with personal computer

d

i

scs.

• Discs recor

d

e

d

in t

h

is recor

d

er may not operate as

expecte

d

on ot

h

er DVD p

l

a

y

ers, recor

d

ers or persona

l

com

p

uter

d

rives

.

B

ecause o

f

problems and errors that can occur during the

c

reation o

f

DVD and CD so

f

tware and

/

or the manu

f

acture

of

DVD and CD discs

,

Toshiba cannot assure that this unit

w

ill success

f

ully play every disc bearing th

e

DVD

a

n

d

C

D

l

ogos. I

f

you happen to experience any di

ff

iculty playing a

D

VD an

d

/or CD

d

isc on t

h

is unit, p

l

ease contact Tos

h

i

b

a

C

ustomer

S

ervice

.

DVD p

l

ayers wit

h

are capable o

f

playing DVD-RW

recor

d

e

d

in VR mo

d

e

.

Following discs are recommended

f

or good recording

q

ua

l

ity an

d

are proven to

b

e compati

bl

e wit

h

t

h

is unit.

However,

d

epen

d

ing on t

h

e me

d

ia con

d

ition, t

h

e unit

may not rea

d

t

h

e

d

isc proper

l

y

.

Ver

b

atim DVD+R 8x, DVD+RW 4x, DVD-R 8x, DVD-RW 2

x

JV

C

DVD-RW 4x

M

axe

ll

DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD-R 8x/16

x

SO

NY DVD+R 4x

/

8x

/

16x, DVD+RW 4x

T

DK DVD+R 4x

/

8x

/

16

x

Per

f

ormance o

f

any other discs are not guaranteed.

FEATURES

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 10E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 10 2009/12/14 18:31:512009/12/14 18:31:51

11

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

Fr

o

n

t

P

a

n

el

R

ear Pane

l

1. I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

b

utto

n

•

Press to turn on t

h

e unit, or to turn t

h

e unit into t

h

e

stan

db

y mo

d

e. (To comp

l

ete

l

y s

h

ut

d

own t

h

e unit, you

must unp

l

ug t

h

e AC power cor

d

.

)

•

I

f

timer programmings have been set, press to turn the unit

into t

h

e timer-stan

db

y mo

d

e

.

2. D

i

sc tra

y

•

P

l

ace a

d

isc w

h

en t

h

e

d

isc tray is opene

d

.

3

.

A

OPEN/CLOSE

b

utton*

•

Press to open or c

l

ose t

h

e

d

isc tray

.

4. In

f

rared sensor windo

w

•

Receive signals

f

rom your remote control so that you can

control the unit

f

rom a distance

.

5. Disp

l

a

y

•

Re

f

er to “FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE” on page 17.

6. HDMI in

d

icator

•

Lig

h

ts up an

d

in

d

icates t

h

e HDMI vi

d

eo reso

l

ution w

h

en

H

D

MI output is on

.

7.

S

KIP

H

b

utto

n

•

During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press once mi

d

way t

h

roug

h

a c

h

apter or

track to go back to the beginning o

f

the current chapter

or trac

k

. W

h

en presse

d

twice in quic

k

succession, p

l

ay

b

ac

k

will start

f

rom the preceding chapter or track

.

•

During playback, press and hold

f

or 1.5 seconds to

f

ast

re

v

erse.

•

W

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is pause

d

, press to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

reverse step

b

y step

.

•

When playback is paused, press and hold

f

or 1.5 seconds to

slo

w r

e

v

e

r

se.

1. VIDEO IN

j

ac

k

(L1)

•

Use

to

co

nn

ect

e

x

te

rn

a

l

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A vi

deo

cab

l

e.

2. VIDEO OUT

j

ac

k

•

U

se to connect a TV monitor

,

AV receiver or other device

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A vi

deo

cab

l

e.

3. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

j

acks

•

U

se to connect a TV monitor with com

p

onent video in

p

uts

with a com

p

onent video cable

.

4. HDMI OUT jac

k

•

U

se an HDMI cable to connect to a displa

y

with an HDMI

c

om

p

atible

p

ort

.

5.

A

C

P

o

w

e

r

Co

r

d

•

C

onnect to a standard AC outlet to suppl

y

power to this

u

ni

t.

•

U

nplug this cord from the AC outlet to completel

y

shut

do

wn

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

6. COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

j

ack

•

U

se to connect an AV receiver, Dolb

y

Digital decoder, DTS

decoder or other device with a di

g

ital audio coaxial input

j

ac

k

wit

h

a

d

igita

l

au

d

io coaxia

l

ca

bl

e

.

7. S-VIDEO OUT

j

ac

k

•

Use to connect the S-video in

p

ut o

f

a TV monitor, A

V

r

ece

iv

e

r

o

r

ot

h

e

r

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h

a

n

S

-vi

deo

cab

l

e.

8. AUDIO OUT

j

ack

s

•

Use to connect a TV monitor

,

AV receiver or other device

wi

t

h

a

n R

C

A

aud

i

o

cab

l

e.

9. S-VIDEO IN

j

ack (L1)

•

Use to connect the S-video out

p

ut of external device with

a

n

S

-vi

deo

cable.

10. AUDIO IN

j

acks (L1

)

•

Use

to

co

nn

ect

e

x

te

rn

al

de

vi

ce

wi

th

a

n R

C

A

aud

i

o

cable.

N

ot

e

•

Do not touch the inner pins of the

j

acks on the rear

panel. Electrostatic discharge ma

y

cause permanent

dama

g

e to the unit

.

IN OUT

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

L

R

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

5

769 810

321 4

23* 7 8 9 10* 11

1314

15

54 61

12

(

*) The unit can also be turned on b

y

pressing these buttons

.

8.

S

KIP

G

b

utto

n

•

During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to s

k

ip to t

h

e next c

h

apter or trac

k.

•

During playback, press and hold

f

or 1.5 seconds to

f

ast

fo

rw

a

r

d.

•

W

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is pause

d

, press to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

a

d

vance step

b

y step

.

•

When playback is paused, press and hold

f

or 1.5 seconds to

s

l

o

w

fo

rw

a

r

d.

9

.

C

STOP

b

utton

•

Press to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

or recor

d

ing

.

1

0

.

B

PLAY

b

utton*

•

Press to start or resume p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

11

.

I

REC

b

utton

•

Press once to start a recor

d

ing. Press repeate

dl

y to start

one-touc

h

timer recor

d

ing.

12. DV IN jac

k

(L3

)

•

Use to connect the DV output o

f

external device with a D

V

ca

bl

e.

13. AUDIO input jac

k

s (L2)

•

Use to connect externa

l

d

evice wit

h

an RCA au

d

io ca

bl

e

.

14. VIDEO input jac

k

(L2

)

•

Use to connect externa

l

d

evice wit

h

an RCA vi

d

eo ca

bl

e

.

15. USB input jac

k

•

You can p

l

ug your USB

d

evice

h

ere, an

d

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

t

h

e

co

n

te

n

ts

i

n

it.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 11E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 11 2009/12/14 18:31:542009/12/14 18:31:54

12

EN

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

Re

m

ote

Co

n

t

r

ol

Installing the Batteries in the Remote

Co

nt

ro

l

K

eep in mind the

f

ollowin

g

when usin

g

the remote

co

n

t

r

o

l

:

•

Ma

k

e sure t

h

at t

h

ere are no o

b

stac

l

es

b

etween t

h

e remote

control and the in

f

rared sensor window on the unit

.

•

Remote operation may become unreliable i

f

strong

s

unli

g

ht or

f

luorescent li

g

ht is shinin

g

on the in

f

rared

se

n

so

r win

do

w

of

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

•

Remote control

f

or di

ff

erent devices can inter

f

ere with

each other. Avoid using remote control

f

or other device

l

ocate

d

c

l

ose to t

h

e unit

.

•

Replace the batteries when

y

ou notice a

f

all o

ff

in the

operating range o

f

the remote control

.

•

The maximum operable ranges

f

rom the unit are as

f

ollows

.

-

L

ine o

f

sigh

t

: approx. 23

f

eet (7m

)

-

E

i

t

h

e

r

s

i

de

of

t

h

e

ce

n

te

r

:

a

pp

rox. 23

f

eet (7m) within 30°

Insta

ll

2 AA (1.5 V)

b

atteries matc

h

ing t

h

e po

l

arity

indicated inside battery compartment o

f

the remote

contro

l.

Caut

i

o

n

:

N

e

v

e

r

t

hr

o

w

batte

ri

es

in

to

a

f

ir

e.

N

ote

:

•

B

e

su

r

e

to

use

AA

s

iz

e

batte

ri

es.

•

Dispose of batteries in a desi

g

nated disposal area

.

•

Batteries should always be disposed o

f

with the

environment in mind. Always dispose o

f

batteries in

accor

d

ance wit

h

app

l

ica

bl

e

l

aws an

d

regu

l

ations

.

•

If the remote control does not operate correctl

y

, or i

f

the operatin

g

ran

g

e becomes reduced, replace

batte

ri

es

wi

t

h n

e

w

o

n

es.

•

When necessar

y

to replace batteries in the remote

control, alwa

y

s replace both batteries with new ones.

Never mix batter

y

t

y

pes or use new and used

batte

ri

es

in

co

m

b

in

at

i

o

n

.

•

Always remove batteries

f

rom remote control i

f

they

are dead or i

f

the remote control is not to be used

f

or

an extended period o

f

time. This will prevent battery

acid

f

rom leaking into the battery compartment

.

U

sing a Remote Contro

l

1

O

p

en the cover.

2

In

se

r

t

batte

ri

es.

Ma

k

e sure to matc

h

+ an

d

- on t

h

e

b

atteries to

t

h

e mar

k

s in

d

icate

d

in t

h

e

b

attery compartment

.

3

Close

the

co

v

e

r

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAUSE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

2*

3

18

17

19

21

23

24 25

20

28

30

26

27

29

22

4

5

7

12

13

8

10

6

9

11*

14

115

16

23feet (7m)

30˚30˚

23feet (7m) 23feet (7m)

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 12E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 12 2009/12/14 18:31:562009/12/14 18:31:56

13

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

*

) T

h

e unit can a

l

so

b

e turne

d

on

b

y pressing t

h

ese

b

uttons

.

1

.

INP

U

T

S

ELE

C

T

button

• Press to se

l

ect t

h

e a

pp

ro

p

riate in

p

ut

.

2. OPEN/CLOSE

A

butto

n*

• Press to open or c

l

ose t

h

e

d

isc tra

y.

3. Number

/

Character buttons

• Press to select a title/chapter/track/file on displa

y

.

• Press to enter values

f

or the settin

g

s in the main

menu.

•Pr

ess

to

e

n

te

r

t

i

t

l

e

n

a

m

es.

4

.

S

ET

U

P

button

• Press to

d

isp

l

a

y

t

h

e main menu

.

• During DVD pla

y

back, press and hold

f

or more than

3

secon

d

s to switc

h

t

h

e progressive scanning mo

d

e

to the interlace mode. (Thou

g

h a

pp

ears, the

out

p

ut mo

d

e switc

h

es to t

h

e inter

l

ace an

d

“

” will be displa

y

ed on the front panel

displa

y

brie

f

l

y

.

)

5.

T

O

P MEN

U

butto

n

• Press to displa

y

the title list.

6.

Cu

r

so

r

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

butto

n

s

• Press to select items or settin

g

s

.

7

.

C

LEAR

butto

n

• Press to c

l

ear t

h

e

p

asswor

d

once entere

d

, to cance

l

the pro

g

rammin

g

f

or CD, to clear the selectin

g

mar

k

er num

b

er in t

h

e

d

isp

l

a

y

menu, etc

.

8.

S

KIP

H

butto

n

• During pla

y

back, press to return to the beginning o

f

the current cha

p

ter, track or file

.

• During pla

y

back, press twice in quick succession to

s

k

i

p

to t

h

e

p

revious c

h

a

p

ter or trac

k.

• When pla

y

back is in pause, press repeatedl

y

to

reverse t

h

e p

l

a

yb

ac

k

step

by

step

.

9

.

REV

E

button

• During pla

y

back, press to

f

ast reverse pla

y

back.

• When pla

y

back is in pause, press to slow reverse

pla

y

back

.

1

0.

PA

US

E

F

butto

n

• Press to pause playback or recording

.

11

.

P

LAY

B

butto

n*

• Press to start pla

y

back or resume pla

y

back

.

12

.

TIME

S

LIP

button

• Press once to start recor

d

ing t

h

e TV program

y

ou

are watchin

g

. Press a

g

ain to watch the content

bein

g

recorded from the be

g

innin

g

while recordin

g

continues. (VR mode DVD-RW with the recordin

g

mode of LP, EP or SLP onl

y)

1

3.

REPEAT

button

• Press to displa

y

the repeat menu

.

14

.

RE

C

M

O

DE

butto

n

• Press to switch the recordin

g

mode.

1

5.

HDMI

button

• Pr

ess

to

set

t

h

e

HDMI vi

deo

r

eso

l

ut

i

o

n

.

1

6.

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

button

• Press to turn on the unit

,

or to turn the unit into the

s

tan

dby

mo

d

e. (To comp

l

ete

ly

s

h

ut

d

own t

h

e unit,

y

ou must unp

l

ug t

h

e AC power cor

d

).

• If timer pro

g

rammin

g

s have been set, press to turn

t

h

e unit into t

h

e timer-stan

dby

mo

d

e

.

17

.

S

ATELLITE LINK

button

• Press to turn t

h

e unit into t

h

e sate

ll

ite

l

in

k

stan

dby

m

ode.

• In t

h

e sate

ll

ite

l

in

k

stan

dby

mo

d

e, press to cance

l

t

h

e

m

ode

a

n

d

to

tu

rn

t

h

e

u

ni

t

o

n

.

1

8.

TIMER PR

O

G

.

butto

n

• Press to

d

isp

l

a

y

t

h

e timer programming

l

ist.

19

.

A

U

DI

O

button

• Press to

d

isp

l

a

y

t

h

e au

d

io menu

d

uring p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

2

0.

DI

S

PLAY

button

• Press to displa

y

the displa

y

menu on or off

.

21. MENU

/

LIST

b

utton

• Press to displa

y

the disc menu. To change original

an

d

p

l

a

yl

ist on t

h

e TV screen.

22

.

ENTER

button

• Pr

ess

to

co

nfirm

o

r

se

l

ect

m

e

n

u

i

te

m

s.

2

3.

R

ET

URN

button

• Press to return to t

h

e previous

d

isp

l

aye

d

menu

s

c

reen.

2

4

.

S

KIP

G

button

• During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to s

k

ip to t

h

e next c

h

apter,

t

r

ac

k

o

r

f

il

e.

• W

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is in pause, press repeate

dl

y to

f

orward the playback step by step

.

25. FW

D

b

utto

n

• During playback, press to

f

ast

f

orward playback

.

• When pla

y

back is in pause, press to slow

f

orward

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

2

6.

S

T

O

P

C

button

• Press to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

or recor

d

ing.

• Press to exit

f

rom the title list.

27

.

IN

S

TANT

S

KIP

button

• During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to s

k

ip 30 secon

d

s

.

28. 1.3x/0.8x PLAY

b

utto

n

• During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

in a s

l

ig

h

t

l

y

f

aster/slower speed while keeping the sound output

.

29

.

Z

OO

M

butto

n

• During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press to en

l

arge t

h

e picture on t

h

e

TV

sc

r

ee

n

.

30. RE

C

I

b

utto

n

• Press once to start a recor

d

ing

.

• Press repeate

dl

y to start t

h

e one-touc

h

timer

recor

d

in

g.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 13E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 13 2009/12/14 18:31:572009/12/14 18:31:57

14

EN

T

his unit uses the following on-screen displays and menus to guide you to the easy operations.

T

he on-screen displays give you the in

f

ormation on the loaded disc, the disc/

f

ile in playback, or the HDMI status, etc.

T

he menus allow

y

ou to change the various kinds o

f

settings

f

or pla

y

ing back, recording, or editing to suit

y

our pre

f

erence.

On-Screen Disp

l

a

y

/ Me

nu

GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS

Disc Information / Menu

T

he on-screen display changes in the

f

ollowing order

as you press

[

DISPLAY

].

O

F

Disc Information

/

Men

u

T

itle Name In

f

ormatio

n

(

onl

y

when DVD+RW/+R, VR mode DVD-RW/-R, o

r

un

f

inalized Video mode DVD-RW/-R is in pla

y

back

)

or

Fil

e

N

a

m

e

Inf

o

rm

at

i

on

(on

ly

w

h

en a CD wit

h

MP3

/

J

PEG

f

iles is in playback

)

M

P3 Ta

g

Informatio

n

(onl

y

when a MP3

f

ile is in pla

y

back)

HDMI In

fo

rm

at

i

on

(only

f

or the images output through the HDMI output)

SP 1:53

25

613

74

4

*

T

his is an example screen onl

y

for explanation

.

1.

Indicates a disc type and

f

ormat mode

.

2.

Indicates a type o

f

titles

f

or VR mode DVD-RW

.

3.

In

d

icates a se

l

ecte

d

externa

l

input mo

d

e

.

4.

In

d

icates a recor

d

ing mo

d

e an

d

possi

bl

e recor

d

ing

time le

f

t

.

5.

Indicates a title number / total number o

f

titles, chapter

number / total number o

f

chapters, elapsed time and

total time o

f

disc playback

.

6.

E

ach

i

co

n m

ea

n

s:

: Search

: Audio

: Subtitle

: Angle

: Repeat

: Marker

: Noise Reduction / Black Level

: Zoom

: Surround

7.

In

d

icates an operation status

.

N

ote

• In some

d

escriptions on t

h

is manua

l

, on

ly

one

d

isc

t

y

pe is indicated as an example

.

Title/File Name Information

T

i

t

l

e

n

a

m

e

inf

o

rm

at

i

on

Title Name

My Title

F

il

e

n

a

m

e

inf

o

rm

at

i

on

File Name

My File

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 14E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 14 2009/12/14 18:31:592009/12/14 18:31:59

15

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

Video Info. : 480p / YCbCr

Audio Info. : Bitstream

21

3

*1

.

Indicates the resolution of the HDMI output ima

g

e

.

*

2

.

Indicates the HDMI video

f

ormat

.

*

3

.

Indicates the HDMI audio

f

ormat

.

*

“- - -” will be displa

y

ed, when it does not have an

y

inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

.

HDMI Information

GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS

•

First, trac

k

name wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d.

Track Name

•

If

y

ou press

[

DISPLAY

]

one more time

,

artist name will

b

e displa

y

ed

.

Artist Name

•

If

y

ou press

[

DISPLAY

]

one more time

,

a

lb

um name

will be displayed

.

Album Name

•

I

f

there is no artist, track or album name, “Not Available”

wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d.

MP3 Tag Information

Pr

ess

[

SETUP

]

to

d

isp

l

a

y

t

h

e main menu. T

h

en

use

[

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect

a

m

e

n

u

a

n

d

press

[

ENTER

]

to displa

y

the

menu. These menus

p

rovide entries to all main functions

of

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

1

. Genera

l

Setting

:

To

g

o to

g

eneral settin

g

menu

.

2. T

i

mer Programm

i

ng

:

To pro

g

ram a timer recordin

g.

3.

Ti

tle

Li

st:

To ca

ll

u

p

t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist

.

4.

D

V

D

M

e

n

u:

To set up t

h

e DVD setting

.

5. DISC Pla

y

back Mode:

To set up t

h

e

d

isc p

l

a

yb

ac

k

setting.

• “DISC Playback Mode” is available only when an audio

CD

,

a CD-RW/-R with MP3 / JPEG

f

iles is inserted into

the

u

ni

t.

6. USB Pla

y

back Mode

:

To set up t

h

e USB p

l

a

yb

ac

k

setting.

• “USB Playback Mode” is available only when a USB

de

vi

ce

i

s

co

nn

ected.

Setup

Timer Programming

Title List

DVD Menu

DISC Playback Mode

General Setting

USB Playback Mode

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

General Setting Menu

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

HDMI

Reset All

1

2

3

4

5

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

. Pla

y

back

:

To set up the unit to pla

y

back discs as

y

ou prefer

.

2. Displa

y:

To set up the OSD screen as

y

ou prefer

.

3.

Vi

deo:

To set up the video settin

g

.

4

. Recordin

g:

To set up the unit to record to discs as

y

ou prefer

.

5.

C

l

oc

k

:

To set up the clock of the unit as

y

ou need

.

6.

HDMI

:

To set up the HDMI connection settin

g.

7.

R

eset

All

:

To reset the setting to the factor

y

default.

M

ai

n M

e

n

u

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 15E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 15 2009/12/14 18:32:002009/12/14 18:32:00

1

6

EN

1

.

F

o

rm

at

(

DVD-RW, DVD+RW on

ly)

:

Allows

y

ou to format the disc.

2

.

Fin

a

liz

e:

Allows

y

ou to

f

inalize a disc containing recorded titles.

3.

Di

sc

Pr

otect

(VR mode DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R onl

y)

:

Allows

y

ou to protect a disc from accidental editing or

recordin

g.

4

.

Delete All Pla

y

lists

(

VR mode DVD-RW onl

y)

:

Allows

y

ou to delete pla

y

list.

5. Random Pla

y:

Allows

y

ou to activate the random pla

y

back feature.

6. Program Pla

y

:(Audio CD onl

y)

Allows

y

ou to activate the program pla

y

back feature

.

7.

M

us

i

c:

Allows

y

ou to make settings for MP3 pla

y

back

.

8.

Ph

oto:

Allows

y

ou to make settings for JPEG pla

y

back

.

9

.

S

li

de

S

h

o

w

:

(JPEG files onl

y)

Allows

y

ou to select the displa

y

time of the slide show

m

ode.

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

<DVD M

e

n

u>

<

DISC Pla

y

back Mode men

u

>

DVD Menu / DISC Playback Mode

GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS

DISC Playback Mode

Music

Photo

Random Play

Slide Show

3

7

3

8

3

5

3

9

W

hen a JPEG

/

MP3 disc is inserted

:

DISC Playback Mode

Random Play

Program Play

1

2

5

6

W

h

e

n

a

n A

ud

i

o

C

D i

s

in

se

r

ted:

USB Playback Mode

1

.

M

us

i

c:

Allows

y

ou to make settings for MP3 pla

y

back

.

2

.

Ph

oto:

Allows

y

ou to make settings for JPEG pla

y

back

.

3

. Random Pla

y:

Allows

y

ou to activate the random pla

y

back feature.

4

.

S

li

de

S

h

o

w

:

(JPEG files onl

y)

Allows

y

ou to select the displa

y

time of the slide show

m

ode.

USB Playback Mode

Music

Photo

Random Play

Slide Show

1

2

3

4

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 16E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 16 2009/12/14 18:32:022009/12/14 18:32:02

17

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE

A

ppears w

h

en

d

ata is

b

ein

g

reco

r

ded

o

n

a

d

i

sc.

App

ears when a disc is loaded

o

n the disc tra

y.

A

ppears w

h

en t

h

e

d

isc tray is

o

pen

i

ng

.

A

pp

ears when HDMI video

resolution (720

p

) is selected

.

Appears w

h

en HDMI vi

d

eo

reso

l

ution (1080p) is se

l

ecte

d.

Appears w

h

en HDMI vi

d

eo

reso

l

ution (480p) is se

l

ecte

d.

A

pp

ears when HDMI video

resolution

(

1080i

)

is selected

.

A

ppears when the disc tra

y

is

cl

osin

g.

Disp

l

ay Message

PM

BS CS DR CD

HDD

1

4

2

3

1

.

PM

: Appears in the afternoon with the clock displa

y.

2. Title / track and cha

p

ter mar

k

: Appears w

h

en in

d

icating a tit

l

e / trac

k

num

b

er

.

: Appears w

h

en in

d

icatin

g

a c

h

apter num

b

er

.

3. Current status o

f

the uni

t

: Appears w

h

en p

l

ay

b

ac

k

is pause

d

.

: Appears when pla

y

ing back a disc

.

: Appears w

h

en t

h

e timer pro

g

rammin

g

or OTR

h

as been set and is proceedin

g.

: F

l

as

h

es w

h

en a

ll

timer recor

d

in

g

s

h

ave

b

een

f

ini

s

h

ed.

: Appears

d

uring recor

d

ing process

.

: Flashes when a recordin

g

pauses

.

: Appears w

h

en a

d

isc is in t

h

is unit.

4. Displays the

f

ollowin

g

• E

l

apse

d

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

tim

e

• Current title / chapter / track /

f

ile number

• Recordin

g

time / remainin

g

tim

e

•

Clock

• Se

l

ecte

d

externa

l

input position

• Remainin

g

time for one-touch timer recordin

g

• Selected HDMI video resolutio

n

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 17E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 17 2009/12/14 18:32:032009/12/14 18:32:03

1

8

EN

CONNECTIONS

Connecti

ng

to an Externa

l

Tune

r

Read

t

hi

s

fir

st:

1)

Disconnect the AC power cords o

f

the devices

f

rom the AC outlet.

2

)

M

ake

the

co

nn

ect

i

o

n

as

i

llust

r

ated

belo

w

.

3

)

After making all the connections, connect the AC power cords of the devices

.

•

Connect this unit directl

y

to the TV. I

f

the RCA audio/video cables are connected to a VCR, DVD pla

y

back pictures

ma

y

b

e

d

istorte

d

ue to t

h

e cop

y

protection s

y

stem

.

•

W

hen “Progressive Scan” is set to “ON”, no video signal will be output

f

rom the VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT

j

ack

.

N

ote

• Required cables and connecting methods di

ff

er depending on the external tuner

.

For more in

f

ormation, please contact

y

our external tuner provider

.

W

it

h

t

h

is setup

:

• You can record an

y

unscrambled channel b

y

selecting the channel on the external tuner. Be sure that the external

tu

n

e

r i

s

tu

rn

ed

o

n

.

• You cannot recor

d

one c

h

anne

l

w

h

i

l

e watc

h

ing anot

h

er c

h

anne

l.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

T

V

Co

nn

ect

i

o

n

O

v

e

rvi

ew

If Your TV has Refer to

Standard

Quality

Higher

Quality

If your device has

only an ANT. IN jack

page

19

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

LR

VIDEO IN

page

21

page

20

page

20

page

21

S-VIDEO IN

HDMI IN

ANT. IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

L

R

IN

L

R

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

AUDIO OUT

ANT. INANT.OUT

LR

VIDEO OUTAUDIO OUT

rear of this unit

external tuner

RCA video

cable

RCA audio cable

RCA audio

cable

RCA video cable

satellite

dish

ANT. IN

cable TV

company

RF coaxial cable

or

VIDEO

OUT

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

IN

VIDEO

IN

L

R

AUDIO IN

(L1)

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

IN

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

A

f

ter making the connection as described above, make sure to select the appropriate input type by

f

ollowing the

s

teps on page

2

6

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 18E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 18 2009/12/14 18:32:082009/12/14 18:32:08

19

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

CONNECTIONS

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

rear of this unit

Do not tilt the connector when inserting it into the HDMI jack, and make sure the

shapes of the jack and the connector are matched.

IN OUT

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

L

R

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

HDMI OUT

HDMI cable

HDMI Vi

d

eo Reso

l

ution an

d

Actua

l

Output Signa

ls

P

r

ess

[HDMI]

t

o select the HDMI video resolution. The video resolution changes as follows ever

y

time

[

HDMI

]

is

p

resse

d.

Front Panel Displa

y

V

ideo Output Si

g

nal

4

80 Progress

i

v

e

Press

[

HDMI

]

7

20 Progress

i

v

e

Press

[

HDMI

]

1

080

in

te

rl

aced

Press

[

HDMI

]

1

080 Pro

g

ress

i

v

e

Press

[

HDMI

]

• T

h

e HDMI mo

d

e t

h

at is not supporte

d

b

y

d

isp

l

ay

d

evice wi

ll

b

e s

k

ippe

d

.

Cop

y

right protection s

y

ste

m

T

o pla

y

back the digital video images of a DVD via an HDMI connection, it is necessar

y

that both the pla

y

er and the

displa

y

device (or an AV ampli

f

ier) support a cop

y

right protection s

y

stem called HDCP (high-bandwidth digital

c

ontent protection s

y

stem). HDCP is cop

y

protection tec

h

no

l

og

y

t

h

at comprises

d

ata encr

y

ption an

d

aut

h

entication

of

the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the operating instructions o

f

y

our displa

y

device

(

or AV am

p

lifier) for more information

.

N

ote

f

o

r HDMI

Co

nn

ect

i

on

•

B

e

cause HDMI is an evolving technolog

y

, it is possible that some devices with an HDMI input ma

y

not operate

properl

y

with this unit

.

•

When using an HDCP-incompatible displa

y

device, the image will not be viewed properl

y

.

•

Amon

g

the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; this unit

c

an be controlled b

y

another device via the HDMI connector

.

•

When this unit’s HDMI connector is connected to a DVI-D com

p

atible monitor (HDCP com

p

atible) with an HDMI-DVI

c

onverter cable, the si

g

nals are output in di

g

ital RGB

.

•

When the power failure occurs, or when

y

ou unplug the unit, some problems in the HDMI setting might occur.

Please check and set the HDMI settin

g

a

g

ain

.

No supplied cables are used in this connection:

Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 19E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 19 2009/12/14 18:32:102009/12/14 18:32:10

2

0

EN

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to a TV wit

h

Component Vi

d

eo Input

j

ac

k

s

Connecting to a TV wit

h

an S-Vi

d

eo Input Jac

k

OUT

S-VIDEO

L

R

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

OUT

rear of this unit

RCA audio cable

S-video cable

S-VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

L

R

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

L

R

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

OUT

rear of this unit

RCA audio

cable

Y

PB

/CB

PR

/CR

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

L

R

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO IN

RCA component

video cable

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 20E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 20 2009/12/14 18:32:122009/12/14 18:32:12

21

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

Au

d

io / Vi

d

eo Input Jac

k

s

CONNECTIONS

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

IN

L

R

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

L

R

AUDIO IN

(L1)

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

IN

ANT. IN

rear of this unit

RCA audio cable

RCA video cable

AUDIO IN TO TVANT. IN

LR

CHANNEL

43

VIDEO IN

RF modulator

VHF / UHF

antenna

cable TV

company

or

Set channel 3 or 4

RF coaxial cable

ANT. INANT.OUT

LR

VIDEO OUTAUDIO OUT

external tuner

N

ot

e

• RF modulator is not supplied with this unit. You need to purchase it at

y

our local store.

• The qualit

y

of picture ma

y

become poor if this unit is connected to an RF modulator.

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

L

R

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

OUT

RCA audio cable

RCA video cable

rear of this unit

AUDIO IN

L

R

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO IN

C

onnecting to a TV wit

h

out Au

d

io / Vi

d

eo Input Jac

k

s

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 21E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 21 2009/12/14 18:32:132009/12/14 18:32:13

22

EN

CONNECTIONS

Di

g

ita

l

Au

d

io Connection

Coa

xi

al

Cable

Co

nn

ect

i

on

HDMI A

ud

i

o

Co

nn

ect

i

on

To set up “Dolb

y

Digital”, refer to pages 81 and 83-85

.

Setting in the Setup Menu

Actual Audio Output

Audio Format

(

disc

)

Dolb

y

Digital Setting

of

this unit

(

re

f

er to

pa

g

e 85

)

D

TS Settin

g

o

f

t

hi

s

u

ni

t

(

refer to pa

g

e 85

)

HDMI

OUT

DIGITAL A

U

DI

O

OU

TP

UT

Do

lb

y Digita

l

S

trea

m

—

D

o

lb

y Digita

l

D

o

lb

y Digita

l

PCM

—

2

c

h

anne

l

PC

M

2 c

h

anne

l

PC

M

DT

S®

—

ON

D

T

S

®

D

T

S®

—

O

F

N

o outpu

t

N

o outpu

t

LP

CM

S

trea

m

ON

2

c

h

anne

l

PC

M

2 c

h

anne

l

PC

M

PCM

O

F

2

c

h

anne

l

PC

M

2 c

h

anne

l

PC

M

ulti Channel Di

g

ital Audio Settin

g

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

COAXIAL

rear of this unit

Dolby Digital decoder

digital audio

coaxial cable

digital audio

coaxial input jack

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

IN

L

R

AUDIO IN

(L1)

OUT

S-VIDEO

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

HDMI OUT

rear of this unit

AV receiver / amplier with an HDMI input jack

HDMI IN

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

IN

L

R

AUDIO IN

(L1)

OUT

S-VIDEO

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

HDMI cable

HDMI OUT

No supplied cables are used in these connections:

Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.

To set up “HDMI Audio”, re

f

er to pages 82 and 90-91

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 22E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 22 2009/12/14 18:32:142009/12/14 18:32:14

23

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

CONNECTIONS

2

C

h

anne

l

Ana

l

og Au

d

io Connectio

n

IN

Y

PR/CR

PB/CB

L

R

S-VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

OUT

S-VIDEO

L

R

AUDIO IN

(L1)

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

IN

stereo system

analog audio

input jacks

AUDIO OUT

RCA audio cable

AUDIO OUT

L

R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

L

R

AUDIO IN

LR

rear of this unit

Note

•

The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital multi channel surround

f

ormat cannot be recorded as digital sound by

a

n MD

o

r DAT

deck.

•

B

y

connecting this unit to a Dolb

y

Digital decoder,

y

ou can enjo

y

high-qualit

y

Dolb

y

Digital multi channel surround

sou

n

d

as

hea

r

d

in

the

m

o

vi

e

theate

r

s.

•

By connecting t

h

is unit to t

h

e DTS

d

eco

d

er, you can enjoy Mu

l

ti-c

h

anne

l

Surroun

d

System w

h

ic

h

repro

d

uces t

h

e

original sound as truth

f

ully as possible. Multi-channel Surround System is developed by the DTS, Inc

.

•

Pla

y

ing back a DVD using incorrect settings ma

y

generate noise distortion and ma

y

also damage the speakers

.

•

For audio CD and MP3

f

iles, 2 channel PCM will be output regardless o

f

the “Dolb

y

Digital” setting.

I

f

the connected device is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, audio will be output as PCM even i

f

you select

“

Stream” in “Dolby Digital” setting (Re

f

er to page 85)

.

•

The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequenc

y

, the number of channels and bit

l

ength) ma

y

be limited b

y

the device that is connected

.

•

Among the monitors that support HDMI, some do not support audio output (

f

or example, projectors). In connections

with device such as this unit, audio signals are not output

f

rom the HDMI output connector

.

•

I

f

the connected equipment is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, DTS sound will not be output

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 23E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 23 2009/12/14 18:32:162009/12/14 18:32:16

24

EN

INITIAL SETTING

W

hen

y

ou turn on this unit

f

or the

f

irst time,

y

ou need to

f

ollow these steps a

f

ter

y

ou have completed all the

co

nn

ectio

n

s.

1

A

f

ter

y

ou have made all the

necessar

y

connect

i

ons, press

[

I

/

y

O

N/STANDBY] to turn on t

h

e

u

n

it.

2

Turn on

y

our TV.

3

Pr

ess

t

h

e

butto

n

o

n

t

h

e

TV’

s

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

ol

that

accesses

the

e

x

te

rn

al

input channel. It ma

y

be labeled

“SOURCE”

,

“AV” or “SELECT” (refer to

y

our TV’s user manual). Or press “2”

on t

h

e TV’s remote contro

l,

t

h

en

press c

h

anne

l

d

own

b

utton

repeate

dly

unti

l

y

ou see t

h

e

“

Ini

t

i

al

Sett

i

n

g

” men

u

.

Initial Setting

Select the language for Setup display.

OSD Language

English

Français

Español

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect your

d

esire

d

l

anguage, t

h

en press [ENTER] to set

l

anguage

.

5

Press [ENTER] to activate “C

l

oc

k

Sett

i

ng”

.

Initial Setting

ENTER: Set Clock.

RETURN: Exit Initial Setting.

Clock Setting

- - - / - - / - - - - ( - - - )

- - : - - - -

6

Proceed to step 4 in “Clock Settin

g

”

on page 25

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 24E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 24 2009/12/14 18:32:162009/12/14 18:32:16

25

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SETTING THE CLOCK

Set the clock be

f

ore you try the timer programming

.

1

Press [SETUP] an

d

use

[

K

/

L

]

to

s

elect “General Settin

g

”, then press

[

ENTER

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “C

l

oc

k

”

,

t

h

en

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

“

Clock” menu will a

pp

ear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect ca

l

en

d

ar or time,

th

en

p

ress [ENTER].

Clock Setting

JAN / 01 / 2010 ( FRI )

12 : 00 AM

4

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to select an item to set

,

a

n

d

use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e contents

t

o suit

y

our pre

f

erence, then press

[

ENTER

].

Clock Setting

JAN / 01 / 2010 ( FRI )

12 : 00 AM

Y

our setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

T

he clock start counting when

y

ou press

[

ENTER

]

.

5

Press [SETUP] to exit

.

N

ot

e

• Your clock settin

g

will be lost if either there is a power

failure or this unit has been unplu

gg

ed for more than

30

seco

n

ds.

• For setting the da

y

,

y

ear, hour and minute,

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

ca

n

also

be

used.

• You can set the built-in calendar

f

rom the year 2009

up to

20

5

9.

C

l

oc

k

Settin

g

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 25E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 25 2009/12/14 18:32:182009/12/14 18:32:18

2

6

EN

SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT

You must let the unit know which video input jack you are using before making a recording

.

1

Press

[

SETUP

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Vi

d

eo”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Se

l

ect Vi

d

eo”

,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

externa

l

input position, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the input

j

ac

k

t

y

pe to connect, then press [ENTER]

.

If

y

ou want to use VIDEO IN jack, select “Video

In”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

I

f

you want to use S-VIDEO IN jack, select

“S-Vi

d

eo In”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

HDMI

Reset All

Progressive

TV Aspect

Select Video

Select Video - L1(Rear)

Video In

S-Video In

7

Press

[

SETUP

]

to exit.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 26E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 26 2009/12/14 18:32:202009/12/14 18:32:20

27

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

FORMATTING A DISC

C

hoosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New DVD-R

W

When inserting a brand-new DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the unit automatically starts to initialize the disc. DVD+RW will

a

lwa

y

s be formatted in +VR mode, and DVD-RW will be formatted either video or VR mode according to the recording

f

ormat mode setting o

f

the unit. Be

f

ore insert a brand-new DVD-RW, you need to set the recording

f

ormat to the

desired mode. You can also manuall

y

f

ormat a DVD-RW once it has been used

.

1

Press

[

SETUP

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “DVD Menu”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Setup

Timer Programming

Title List

DVD Menu

General Setting

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Format”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Format Mode”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize Start

Format Mode

5

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Video mode” or

“VR mo

d

e”, t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

6

Press

[

SETUP

]

to exit

.

7

In

se

r

t

a

b

r

a

n

d

-n

e

w

d

i

sc.

Formattin

g

will start

.

Formatting 90%

8

Formattin

g

is completed.

“100%” is in

d

icate

d.

Note

• The recording

f

ormat setting is e

ff

ective only

f

or

D

VD-RW. You cannot change the recording

f

ormat

f

or a DVD-R and DVD+RW/+R

.

• Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

mix

t

w

o

f

o

rm

ats

o

n

o

n

e

DVD-RW

d

i

sc.

If

y

ou insert a disc that has been formatted before, the

recording format is not changed if

y

ou select another

f

ormat in the “Setup” menu onl

y

. To reformat a disc

(change disc format t

y

pe), refer to “Reformatting a

D

isc Manuall

y

” on page 28

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 27E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 27 2009/12/14 18:32:212009/12/14 18:32:21

2

8

EN

FORMATTING A DISC

Re

f

ormatting a Disc Manually

I

f

y

ou are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW,

y

ou can

f

ormat the disc b

y

per

f

orming “Format”. You can

f

ormat DVD-RW

f

or

either video mode recordin

g

or VR mode recordin

g

. DVD+RW can be

f

ormat in order to erase all content o

f

the disc

.

In

se

r

t

a

r

eco

r

dab

l

e

d

i

sc.

1

Press

[

SETUP

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “DVD Menu”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Setup

Timer Programming

Title List

DVD Menu

General Setting

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Format”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mo

d

e DVD-R

W

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Start”

,

t

h

en

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

Start

Format Mode

Se

l

ection menu wi

ll

appear an

d

prompt you to

con

f

irm

.

• For DVD+RW

,

use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes”

,

then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Formatting wi

ll

start

.

If

y

ou want to cancel formatting, select “No”

.

Are you sure?

Yes

No

6

Formatting is comp

l

ete

d.

“100

%

” is indicated

.

Formatting 100%

Note

• When you re

f

ormat the disc, the contents o

f

the disc

are erase

d.

• For DVD-RW, make sure that the recordin

g

format is

set to the desired mode. (See ste

p

s 1 to 6 in

“Choosin

g

the Recordin

g

Format of a Brand-New

D

VD-RW” on pa

g

e 27.

)

• This unit ma

y

not be able to reformat a disc that is

n

ot previousl

y

formatted b

y

this unit e.g. DVD disc

formatted b

y

PC or another recorder

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 28E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 28 2009/12/14 18:32:222009/12/14 18:32:22

29

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT

1

Press

[

SETUP

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “DVD Menu”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Disc Protect

O

FF ON”, t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mo

d

e DVD-R

W

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Protect this disc?

Yes

No

A

d

isc wi

ll

b

e protecte

d.

T

his operation ma

y

take

awhile to be com

p

leted

.

T

o prevent acci

d

enta

l

recor

d

ing, e

d

iting or erasing t

h

e

t

itles, you can protect them

f

rom “DVD Menu” menu

.

N

ot

e

T

o cancel the disc

p

rotect

:

•

W

h

en

y

ou insert a

d

isc protecte

d

wit

h

t

h

is unit,

“

Di

sc

Pr

otect

O

N OFF” will appear instead o

f

“OFF

ON

”.

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect ON OFF

Delete All Playlists

To release the

p

rotection for the disc, select “Disc

Pr

otect

O

N OFF” at ste

p

3, then follow rest of the

p

rocedures.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 29E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 29 2009/12/14 18:32:242009/12/14 18:32:24

30

EN

PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS

1

Press

[

SETUP

]

and use

[

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

“Genera

l

Settin

g

” menu wi

ll

appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Recordin

g

”,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

“Recor

d

in

g

” menu wi

ll

appear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Auto Fina

l

ize”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “Disc Fu

ll

” or

“End o

f

Timer Rec”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Auto Finalize

Disc Full

End of Timer Rec

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “ON”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Disc Full

ON

OFF

End of Timer Rec

ON

OFF

6

Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t.

You can

f

inalize discs automaticall

y

using this

f

unction.

You can use this

f

unction to

f

inalize discs a

f

ter

f

inishin

g

timer recordin

g

s and at the end of the disc space

.

A

uto Fina

l

izin

g

N

ot

e

• This function is not available after finishing dail

y

or

weekl

y

program recording

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 30E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 30 2009/12/14 18:32:252009/12/14 18:32:25

3

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS

F

ina

l

izing a Dis

c

1

Press

[

SETUP

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “DVD Menu”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

“DVD Menu“ menu wi

ll

a

pp

ear

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Fina

l

ize”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then press

[

ENTER

].

e.g.) VR mo

d

e DVD-R

W

Finalize disc?

Yes

No

Finalizin

g

will start

.

Finalizing 90%

Th

is operation may ta

k

e

aw

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

5

Fina

l

izing is comp

l

ete

d

.

You will need to

f

inalize discs to play back on other DVD

p

l

a

y

ers

.

Fina

l

izing may ta

k

e severa

l

minutes up to an

h

our.

Since the process of the finalization fills empt

y

space of

t

he disc, a shorter recordin

g

period on the disc will

require a lon

g

er time period for finalization. Do not

u

nplu

g

the power cord durin

g

finalization

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 31E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 31 2009/12/14 18:32:272009/12/14 18:32:27

3

2

EN

PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS

To cancel

f

inalizing..

.

(DVD-RW on

l

y

)

P

r

ess

[

STOP

C

]

durin

g

the

f

inalizin

g

is in pro

g

ress. Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes”

,

t

hen

p

res

s

[

ENTER

]

. Finalizing is

c

ance

l

e

d

an

d

t

h

e unit switc

h

es to stop mo

d

e

.

Finalizing 5%

Do you want to cancel ?

Yes

No

I

f

“

”

appears w

h

en

[

STOP

C

]

is presse

d

, you cannot

c

ancel

f

inalizing because the

f

inalizing has already

reac

h

e

d

at a critica

l

point in its process

.

If “No” is selected and

[

ENTER

]

or

[

RETURN

]

is presse

d

,

f

inalizin

g

is continued

.

You cannot cancel finalizin

g

a DVD-R, DVD+R and

DVD+RW

o

n

ce

i

t

h

as

sta

r

ted.

Note

•

Fina

l

izing a

d

isc in vi

d

eo mo

d

e an

d

+VR mo

d

e

automatica

lly

creates a tit

l

e menu

.

•

A

f

ter

y

ou

f

inalize the DVD+RW,

y

ou can call up the

title list b

y

pressing

[

TOP MENU

]

,

or

y

ou can call up

t

h

e tit

l

e menu

by

pressing

[

MENU/LIST

]

.

•

Even a

f

ter DVD+RW is

f

inalized, you can still record

or edit. A

f

ter you

f

inalize DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, you

cannot e

d

it or recor

d

anyt

h

ing e

l

se on t

h

at

d

isc

.

•

If

y

ou insert a DVD-RW finalized with this unit, “Undo

Finalization” will a

pp

ear instead of “Finalize” at

ste

p

3

.

•

To release the finalization of the DVD-RW disc

,

select

“

Undo Finalization” at ste

p

3

.

DVD Menu

Format

Undo Finalization

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

•

To undo the

f

inalization o

f

the DVD+RW, make an

a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ing onto t

h

e

d

isc

.

•

DO NOT power off during finalizing. This ma

y

result

in

a

m

a

lf

u

n

ct

i

o

n

.

•

For DVD+RW, i

f

y

ou have added or deleted chapters,

or made chapters hidden, you must

f

inalize the disc

be

f

ore being able to see those e

ff

ects on other units.

T

o p

l

a

y

b

ac

k

d

iscs ot

h

er t

h

an DVD+RW on ot

h

er DVD

pla

y

ers,

y

ou will need to

f

inalize

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 32E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 32 2009/12/14 18:32:282009/12/14 18:32:28

33

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

INFORMATION ON DVD RECORDING

You can select a recordin

g

mode amon

g

5 options, and

th

e recor

d

ing time wi

ll

d

epen

d

on t

h

e recor

d

ing mo

d

e

y

ou select as

f

ollows

.

Recording mode Recording time Video/

Sound Quality

12cm 8cm

XP

60 m

in

1

8 m

in

SP

120 m

in

3

6 m

in

LP

24

0

mi

n

72 min

360

mi

n

1

08

mi

n

S

L

P

480 m

in

144 min

•

T

h

e recor

d

ing times

l

iste

d

a

b

ove are estimates an

d

are

f

or re

f

erence purposes only. Actual recording times may

var

y

.

•

The audio and video qualit

y

of content being recorded

ma

y

differ depending on the recording mode/recording

t

im

e

c

h

ose

n

.

R

ecor

d

ing Mo

d

e

You cannot recor

d

cop

y

-protecte

d

program using t

h

is

unit. Copy-protected video signal is included in DVD

-

vi

d

eos, some sate

ll

ite

b

roa

d

casts, some pa

y

-per-view

stations and some “

p

remium” stations

.

I

f cop

y

-protected material is detected, recording will

pause or stop automaticall

y

and an error message

a

pp

ears on t

h

e screen

.

“Cop

y

-once onl

y

” video can onl

y

be recorded to CPRM

com

p

atible DVD-RW formatted in VR mode

.

W

h

at

i

s

“

C

PRM”

?

C

PRM is a cop

y

protection s

y

stem with scramble s

y

stem

regarding the recording of “cop

y

-once” broadcast

pro

g

rams. CPRM stands for Content Protection for

Reco

r

dab

l

e

M

ed

i

a.

T

his unit is CPRM compatible, which means that

y

ou can

record cop

y

-once broadcast programs, but

y

ou cannot

make another cop

y

of those recordings. CPRM recordings

can onl

y

be made on CPRM compatible DVD-RW

f

ormatted

in VR mo

d

e, an

d

CPRM recor

d

ings can on

ly

b

e p

l

a

y

e

d

b

ac

k

on DVD pla

y

ers that are speci

f

icall

y

compatible with CPRM

.

M

aking discs pla

y

able in other DVD pla

y

ers (Finalize

)

F

or DVD-RW/-R, it is necessar

y

to finalize the disc after

recording, in order to pla

y

back the disc on other DVD

pla

y

ers. (Refer to pages 30-32.) For DVD+RW/+R, it is

r

eco

mm

e

n

ded

to

fin

a

liz

e

t

h

e

d

i

sc

in

o

r

de

r

to

m

a

k

e

t

h

e

disc more compatible to other DVD pla

y

er. When video

and +VR mode disc are finalized

,

a title menu is created.

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

fin

a

liz

e

d

i

scs

in

ot

h

e

r DVD r

eco

r

de

r

s.

R

estrictions on Recor

d

in

g

Note

• This unit cannot record to CD-RW or CD-R.

• DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R an

d

CD-RW/-R recor

d

e

d

on

a persona

l

computer or a DVD or CD recor

d

er may

not be played back i

f

the disc is damaged or dirty or

if

there is condensation on the player’s lens

.

• If

y

ou record a disc using a personal computer, even

i

f it is recorded in a compatible format it ma

y

not be

pla

y

ed back because of the settings of the

a

pp

lication software used to create the disc. (Chec

k

with the software

p

ublisher for more detailed

i

nformation.

)

• Di

scs

r

eco

r

ded

in vi

deo

m

ode

o

n

th

i

s

u

ni

t

ca

nn

ot

record additional in

f

ormation using other DVD

r

eco

r

de

r

s.

• Since t

h

e recor

d

ing is ma

d

e

b

y t

h

e VBR (varia

bl

e

b

it

rate) met

h

o

d

,

d

epen

d

ing on t

h

e picture you are

recording, the actual remaining time

f

or recording

may

b

e a

l

itt

l

e s

h

orter t

h

an t

h

e remaining time

d

isp

l

aye

d

on t

h

e TV screen

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 33E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 33 2009/12/14 18:32:292009/12/14 18:32:29

34

EN

SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING

Use

t

hi

s

featu

r

e

to

m

a

k

e

t

h

e

d

i

scs

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

ot

h

e

r

u

ni

t

recordable on this unit. When

y

ou make an additional

recor

d

ing on t

h

is unit wit

h

“Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e”

set to “ON”, t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist is automatica

ll

y converte

d

to our

sty

l

e

.

1) Press [SETUP] an

d

use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Genera

l

S

etting”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Recor

d

ing”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

“Recor

d

ing” menu wi

ll

appear

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

4

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “ON” or

“

OFF

”

, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Make Recording Compatible

ON

OFF

O

N: Tit

l

e

l

ist wi

ll

b

e rep

l

ace

d

w

h

en you ma

k

e

a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ings to t

h

e

d

iscs recor

d

e

d

by

o

t

h

er units

.

O

FF

:

Pro

h

i

b

iting a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

to t

h

e

d

isc t

h

at

h

as a tit

l

e

l

ist create

d

b

y ot

h

er units

.

5) Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

N

ote

• This

f

unction is also available

f

or un

f

inalized DVD+R.

Ma

k

e Recor

d

in

g

Compati

ble

S

ettin

g

f

or Auto Chapte

r

You can set a speci

f

ied time

f

or chapter marks

.

1) Press [SETUP] an

d

use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

2

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Recor

d

ing”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

“

Recor

d

ing” menu wi

ll

appear

.

3)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect

“

A

uto C

h

apter

”

, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

4

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

time option, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

Auto Chapter

OFF

5 minutes

10 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

60 minutes

5) Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

N

ote

• The interval

f

or auto chapter may be up to two

minutes di

ff

erent

f

rom the time option you set

.

• A

bl

an

k

c

h

apter may

b

e create

d

epen

d

ing on t

h

e

remaining time o

f

the disc

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 34E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 34 2009/12/14 18:32:302009/12/14 18:32:30

35

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING

You can enjoy high quality sound recording. This

f

unction

w

or

k

s on

ly

w

h

en t

h

e recor

d

ing mo

d

e is set at XP.

1) Press [SETUP] an

d

use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Recor

d

ing”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

“

Recordin

g

” menu will appear

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Recordin

g

Audio Select (XP)”,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

4

)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “PCM” or “Dolb

y

Digital

”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Recording Audio Select (XP)

PCM

Dolby Digital

P

C

M

:

Records PCM audio

f

or the best quality sound

.

Dolb

y

Digital

:

Records Dolb

y

Digital audio for good qualit

y

sound

.

5

)

Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

Note

• “PCM” stands

f

or Pulse Code Modulation. It changes

a

na

l

og soun

d

to

d

igita

l

soun

d

wit

h

out compressing

a

u

d

io

d

ata

.

• W

h

en t

h

e recor

d

ing mo

d

e is set at ot

h

er t

h

an XP, t

h

e

u

nit recor

d

s “Do

lb

y Digita

l

” au

d

io automatica

ll

y even

if

you selected “PCM”

.

R

ecor

d

ing Au

d

io Se

l

ect (XP

)

S

etting Aspect Ratio for Video Mode

R

ecor

d

in

g

You can set aspect ratio

f

or video mode recording.

1

) Fo

ll

ow step 1 to 2 on “Recor

d

ing Au

d

io Se

l

ect(XP)”

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Aspect Ratio (Vi

d

eo mo

d

e)”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect your

d

esire

d

setting, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Aspect Ratio (Video mode)

Auto

4 : 3

16 : 9

A

uto

(

default

)

:

I

t

will

be

r

eco

r

ded

wi

t

h whi

c

h

e

v

e

r

t

h

e

ratio that the program

y

ou started to record are

b

r

oadcasted

wi

t

h

.

4

:3

: Recorded in the as

p

ect ratio of 4:3

.

16:

9

: Recorded in the aspect ratio o

f

16:9

.

4

) Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

N

ot

e

• For DVD-RW VR mode, the ima

g

e will be recorded in

w

hichever the ratio that the program

y

ou record are

b

roadcasted with, re

g

ardless of the “Aspect Ratio

(

Video mode)” settin

g.

• For DVD+RW/+R, t

h

e image wi

ll

a

l

wa

y

s

b

e recor

d

e

d

i

n as

p

ect ratio o

f

4:3

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 35E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 35 2009/12/14 18:32:312009/12/14 18:32:31

36

EN

BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING

1

Press

[

I/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

.

Turn on t

h

e TV an

d

b

e sure to se

l

ect t

h

e in

p

ut to

w

h

ic

h

t

h

e unit is connecte

d.

2

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to o

p

en the

disc tra

y

and insert

y

our disc with its

label facin

g

up.

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

3

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to c

l

ose t

h

e

d

isc tray

.

It ma

y

take awhile to load

t

he disc completel

y.

• W

h

en inserting a

b

ran

d

-new DVD-RW or

DVD+RW, t

h

e unit automatica

lly

starts to

fo

rm

at.

• I

f

titles have been recorded on the disc, the

tit

l

e

l

ist is

d

isp

l

aye

d

. Press

[

STOP

C

]

to exit t

h

e

tit

l

e

l

ist.

4

Press [REC MODE] repeatedl

y

to

select a recordin

g

mode

.

Re

f

er to “Recordin

g

Mode” on pa

g

e 33

.

SP 1:53

5

Press

[

INPUT SELECT

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e

a

pp

ro

p

riate externa

l

in

p

ut

p

osition

(L1/L2) to w

h

ic

h

your externa

l

tuner

i

s

co

nn

ected.

T

he

n

select

the

des

ir

ed

cha

nn

el

to

r

eco

r

d

o

n

the

e

x

te

rn

al

tu

n

e

r

.

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e steps to recor

d

TV programs

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

OPEN/

CLOSE

PAU SE

RECREC MODE

STOP

INPUT

SELEC

T

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 36E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 36 2009/12/14 18:32:322009/12/14 18:32:32

3

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING

7

Press [STOP

C

] to stop recor

d

ing.

The recorded title will be included in the title list.

(Refer to “Guide to a Title List” on page 66.

)

e.

g

.

)

DVD+R/DVD-RW/-

R

Wait for a moment 90%

This operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

6

Press [REC

I

] to start recor

d

ing

.

“

I

”

will be displayed

f

or 5 seconds

.

I SP 1:53

P

ress

[

PAUSE

F

]

to pause recor

d

ing.

P

ress

[

PAUSE

F

]

or

[

REC

I

]

aga

i

n to restart

recor

d

ing

.

To set one-touch timer recordin

g

(OTR)..

.

Th

is is a simp

l

e way to set t

h

e recor

d

ing time in

bl

oc

k

s

o

f

30 minutes

.

Pr

ess

[

REC

I

]

repeatedl

y

until the desired recording

t

ime (30 minutes to 8 hours) a

pp

ears on the TV screen.

One-touch timer recording will start

.

0:30

(normal recording)

8:00 7:30

1:00

I 0:30

•

To chan

g

e the recordin

g

len

g

th durin

g

one-touch

timer recordin

g

, press

[

REC

I

]

repeatedl

y

until the

desired len

g

th appears

.

•

To cance

l

one-touc

h

timer recor

d

ing wit

h

in t

h

e

speci

f

ied time, press

[

STOP

C

]

.

Note

• When

y

ou press

[

REC

I

]

,

recording starts immediatel

y

and continues until the disc is

f

ull or

y

ou stop recording

.

• When the unit clock has not been set, the space

f

or a date and time o

f

title names will be blank.

• You cannot chan

g

e the recordin

g

mode durin

g

the recordin

g

pause mode

.

N

ote

f

or one-touch timer recordin

g

• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the

f

ront panel display during one-touch timer recording. Press

[

DISPLAY

]

to

see

i

t

o

n

the

TV

sc

r

ee

n

.

• Unlike the timer recording,

y

ou can perform the following operations during one-touch timer recording

.

- Turning the unit into the standb

y

mode (One-touch timer recording will be canceled.)

.

- Usin

g

[

REC

I

]

o

r

[

STOP

C

]

o

n

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

.

• You cannot use the pause function durin

g

one-touch timer recordin

g.

• When one-touch timer recording is

f

inished and the power is turned into the standby mode, the unit will switch to

the timer-standb

y

mode automaticall

y

i

f

a timer recording has been programmed. Press

[

I

/

y

ON/STANDBY

]

to

cance

l

t

h

e timer-stan

db

y mo

d

e to use t

h

e unit continuous

l

y

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 37E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 37 2009/12/14 18:32:342009/12/14 18:32:34

38

EN

TIMER RECORDING

1

Press

[

TIMER PROG.

]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “New Program”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Timer Programming

1/1

THU JAN/07 10:00AM

Date Start End L1/L2

New Program

• I

f

there are 6 or more programs, use

[

SKIP

j

/

i

]

to c

h

an

g

e pa

g

es

.

You can program the unit to record up to 12 programs

wit

h

in a mont

h

in a

d

vance. Dai

l

y or wee

kl

y program

recor

d

in

g

s are a

l

so avai

l

a

bl

e

.

B

e

f

ore recordin

g

, make sur

e

•

Connect t

h

e externa

l

tuner to eit

h

er L1 or L2 an

d

set it

t

o output au

d

io/vi

d

eo signa

l

s w

h

en it comes to t

h

e time

you want to start recor

d

ing

.

•

Do not change the external tuner’s channel while

y

ou

are recordin

g

. You cannot watch one channel and

r

eco

r

d

a

n

ot

h

e

r

at

t

h

e

sa

m

e

t

im

e.

•

Set the clock before settin

g

a timer pro

g

rammin

g

.

•

Insert a recor

d

a

bl

e

d

isc wit

h

enoug

h

recor

d

a

bl

e space.

Gui

d

e to Timer Programming Disp

l

a

y

Timer Programming

1/1

THU JAN/07 10:00AMSP (1:00)

JAN/ 8/10 1:00 AM L1 SP

Date Start End L1/L2

JAN/08 1:00AM 2:00AM L1

New Program

1

5

3

4

2

1

.

Title of a Timer Pro

g

ram (Contains date, time, external

i

nput, recordin

g

mode of the pro

g

ram

)

2

. Current

d

ate an

d

tim

e

3.

R

ecordin

g

mode and len

g

th of the recordin

g

4

. Timer pro

g

ram lis

t

5.

T

otal number o

f

pages and current page (2 pages maximum)

N

ote

• I

f

you have not set the clock yet:

“Clock Setting” menu will appear instead o

f

the timer programming list at step 1. Continue with the step 3 in

“

Clock Setting” on page 25 be

f

ore setting a timer programming

.

•

Use

[

s

/

B

]

to move the cursor to the left and the ri

g

ht in “Timer Pro

g

rammin

g

” menu

.

•

You cannot ma

k

e a pro

g

ram w

h

ose recor

d

in

g

time excee

d

s 12

h

ours

.

•

Cance

l

t

h

e timer-stan

db

y mo

d

e

b

y pressing

[

I/

y

ON/STANDBY

]

be

f

ore operation. When

f

inished operating, press

[

I

/

y

ON/STANDBY

]

to resume t

h

e timer-stan

db

y mo

d

e.

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

WXYZ

JKL MNO

.@/: ABC DEF

SETUP

SKIPSKIP

TIMER

PROG.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 38E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 38 2009/12/14 18:32:362009/12/14 18:32:36

3

9

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

3

Use [

K

/

L

] to enter t

h

e

d

ate

,

t

h

en

p

ress

[

B

]

.

Date

JAN/08

SP 2 : 00

Start

- - : - -

End

- - : - -

L1/L2

L1

Mode

SP

Daily

MON-SAT

JAN/01

JAN/31

MON-FRI

SAT

FRI

SUN

4

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

or

[

the Number

b

uttons

]

to enter the start and end

time, then

p

ress

[

B

].

Date

SP 2 : 00

Start End

- - : - -

L1/L2

L1

Mode

SP

JAN/08 1 : 00AM

• You cannot make a pro

g

ram whose recordin

g

t

im

e

x

ceeds

12 h

ou

r

s.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select an appropriate

externa

l

input (L1/L2) to w

h

ic

h

your

externa

l

tuner is connecte

d,

t

h

en

p

ress

[

B

]

.

Date

SP 1 : 00

Start End

L1/L2 Mode

SP

JAN/08 1 : 00AM 2 : 00AM

L1

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a recor

d

ing

m

o

d

e

.

Date

SP 1 : 00

Start End

L1/L2 Mode

JAN/08 1 : 00AM 2 : 00AM

L1 SP

Refer to “Recordin

g

Mode” on pa

g

e 33

.

• You can c

h

ec

k

t

h

e remaining recor

d

a

bl

e space

o

f

the disc when you select the recording

m

ode.

Date

SP 1 : 00

Start End

L1/L2 Mode

JAN/08 1 : 00AM 2 : 00AM

L1 SP

Auto recor

d

in

g

mo

d

e se

l

ect...

W

hen “Auto” is selected as a recordin

g

mode, the unit

calculates

ho

w m

uch

t

im

e

i

s

a

v

a

i

lable

o

n

the

d

i

sc

a

n

d

determines the appropriate recordin

g

mode to

comp

l

ete recor

d

ing t

h

e program

.

Date

Auto 1 : 00

Start End

L1/L2 Mode

JAN/08 1 : 00AM 2 : 00AM

L1 Auto

• “Auto” is onl

y

available for one program in the timer

pro

g

ram list.

• T

h

e recor

d

ing ma

y

b

e cut s

h

ort, w

h

en t

h

e avai

l

a

bl

e

recordin

g

space o

f

the disc is too limited

.

7

Press

[

ENTER

]

when all items are

e

n

te

r

ed.

A

f

ter displa

y

ing an instructive message

f

or 10

secon

d

s, timer program

l

ist wi

ll

appear

.

Press ON/STANDBY to Timer Standby mode.

Ensure the external source is turned to

the correct channel.

Timer Programming

THU JAN/07 10:00AMSP (1:00)

JAN/ 8/10 1:00 AM L1 SP

Date Start End L1/L2

JAN/08 1:00AM 2:00AM L1

Your pro

g

ram settin

g

is stored

.

• To set another pro

g

ram, repeat steps 2 to 7

.

• To ex

i

t, press

[

TIMER PROG.

]

or

[

SETUP

]

.

• When 2 or more pro

g

rams are overlapped,

“Timer pro

g

ram overlapped” appears, and the

overlapped program will be displa

y

ed in blue.

To correct the timer pro

g

ram refer to

“Checkin

g

, cancelin

g

, or correctin

g

the timer

pro

g

rammin

g

information” on pa

g

e 40

.

8

Press

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

to set a

t

i

mer pro

g

ramm

i

n

g.

w

ill appear on the

f

ront panel display, while this

unit waits to ma

k

e t

h

e recor

d

ing

.

CS DR CD

HDD

TIMER RECORDING

W

hen pressing

[

L

]

at

t

he current date

,

the

d

ate wi

ll

c

h

ange as

fo

ll

o

w

s.

e.g.

)

January 1s

t

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 39E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 39 2009/12/14 18:32:382009/12/14 18:32:38

4

0

EN

C

h

ec

k

ing, cance

l

ing, or correcting t

h

e timer

programming in

f

ormatio

n

I

f

the timer program did not complete correctl

y

,

t

h

e error num

b

er a

pp

ears in t

h

e timer

programming

l

ist

.

1

)

Press

[

I

/

y

O

N

/S

TANDB

Y

]

.

2

)

Press [TIMER PROG.]

.

3) Check the information on the list

y

ou want to edit

.

Timer Programming

1/1

THU JAN/07 10:00AMSP (1:00)

JAN/ 8/10 1:00 AM L1 SP

Date Start End L1/L2

JAN/08 1:00AM 2:00AM L1

New Program

4-A) To delete the timer pro

g

ram

:

1 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the program

y

ou want to

d

elete, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

2 Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “De

l

ete”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Selection menu will a

pp

ear

.

3 Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

4-B) To correct t

h

e timer program

:

1 Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the program

y

ou want to

correct, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

2 Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Program C

h

ange”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

]

.

3 Correct t

h

e timer program

by

using

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

5

)

Press [TIMER PROG.] to ex

i

t

.

6

)

Press [I

/

y

ON/STANDBY] to return to t

h

e timer

s

tan

dby

mo

d

e

.

Timer Programming

1/1

THU JAN/01 10:00AM

Date Start End L1/L2

E41 JAN/08 1:00AM 2:00AM L1

New Program

Eac

h

e

rr

o

r n

u

m

be

r m

ea

n

s:

E

1-22

E

37-3

9

Recor

d

ing error ot

h

er

t

h

an

b

e

l

o

w

E

4

0

S

ome portion

h

as

n

ot

b

een recor

d

e

d

b

ecause o

f

program

o

ver

l

apping.

R

ecor

d

ing

d

i

d

not

s

tart at t

h

e start time

.

E2

3

-2

4

U

nr

eco

r

dab

l

e

d

i

sc

E

25-2

8

Copy pro

h

i

b

ite

d

progra

m

E2

9

Disc

p

rotecte

d

E41

Po

w

e

r f

a

il

ed

E

30

Di

sc

f

u

l

E42

N

o disc when recordin

g

E

31-3

2

A

l

rea

d

y 99 tit

l

es

r

eco

r

ded

E

4

3

Al

rea

d

y 49 tit

l

es

reco

r

ded

E

3

A

l

rea

d

y 999 c

h

apters

recor

d

e

d

E

4

Al

rea

d

y 254 c

h

apters

r

ecor

d

e

d

E

34

No s

p

ace for Control

inf

o

rm

at

i

on

E4

5

C

op

y

prohibited

p

ro

g

ram

E

35

P

C

A f

u

ll *1 E4

6

I

t

is im

p

ossible to

r

ecord additionall

y

o

n

a

d

i

sc

r

eco

r

ded

by

other units

w

hen settin

g

“

Make Recordin

g

C

om

p

atible” to “OFF”

.

E

3

6

Already

f

inalized

video

f

ormat disc

•

A program wit

h

t

h

e error num

b

er is graye

d

in t

h

e timer

programming

l

ist

.

•

Once the timer pro

g

rammin

g

list with error line(s) is

d

ispla

y

ed, or after canceling and setting again the timer

s

tandb

y

mode, the program line(s) with error will be

c

l

ea

r

ed.

*

1 PCA is a disc's space reserved

f

or recording test

.

N

ot

e

• Pr

ess

[

TIMER PROG.

]

to check the timer recordin

g

in

pro

g

ress

.

W

h

en t

h

e timer recor

d

ing is procee

d

ing, t

h

at

program wi

ll

b

e

h

ig

hl

ig

h

te

d

in re

d

. In t

h

is case, you

cannot se

l

ect any ot

h

er program

.

TIMER RECORDING

1)

Press [STOP

C

]

on t

h

e remote contro

l

.

Con

f

irmation messa

g

e will appear.

2) Se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

• To stop t

h

e timer recor

d

ing imme

d

iate

l

y, press

[

C

STOP] on t

h

e unit

.

To stop t

h

e timer recor

d

ing in progress

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 40E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 40 2009/12/14 18:32:412009/12/14 18:32:41

41

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

TIMER RECORDING

H

ints for Timer Recording

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording PROG. A PROG. B

When the starting time is the same:

A program set previously (PROG. A) has priority.

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording PROG. A

PROG. A

PROG. C

PROG. B

PROG. C

When the starting time and the ending time

for each programs are dierent:

A program that has earlier start time has priority.

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording PROG.B PROG.A

When the recording time is partially overlapped:

PROG. A will start after PROG. B is complete to

be recorded.

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording PROG. B

When the recording time is entirely overlapped:

PROG.A will not be recorded.

T

his unit records the programs according to priorit

y

i

f

the timer programmings are overlapped. The timer

programming set previous

ly

h

as priorit

y.

A timer recording o

f

lower priority will be canceled or start

f

rom the middle.

C

heck the overlapped timer programmings and change the priorit

y

if necessar

y.

•

If there is a power failure or this unit has been

u

nplugged for more than 30 seconds, the clock setting

a

n

d

a

ll

timer programming wi

ll

b

e

l

ost

.

•

If

a

d

i

sc

i

s

n

ot

in

se

r

ted

o

r if

a

in

se

r

ted

d

i

sc

i

s

n

ot

recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+RW, a

full

y

recorded disc, etc.), on the front panel displa

y

flashes and timer recording cannot be performed. In

some cases

,

wi

ll

appear momentari

ly

aroun

d

t

h

e start

p

oint as t

h

e unit attem

p

ts to recor

d

. P

l

ease insert a

r

eco

r

dable

d

i

sc.

• W

h

en a

ll

t

h

e timer recor

d

ing is comp

l

ete

d,

f

lashes. To

pl

ay

b

ac

k

or eject t

h

e recor

d

e

d

isc, press

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

f

irst, then select the recorded title and

press

[

PLA

Y

B

],

or

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to remove t

h

e

d

isc.

•

During timer recording or timer standb

y

mode

(

will

a

ppear), an

y

operations on the unit will not be available.

T

o make these o

p

erations available,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

o

r

[

C

STOP

]

t

o stop the timer recordin

g

or

[

I

/

yy

ON

/

STANDB

Y

]

to cancel timer standb

y

mode

(

w

ill disa

pp

ear)

.

• To cance

l

t

h

e timer stan

dby

mo

d

e, press

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

.

• W

h

en t

h

e starting an

d

t

h

e en

d

ing time are t

h

e same,

“Excee

d

s 12

h

ours” appears an

d

t

h

e program setting wi

ll

not be acce

p

ted

.

• W

h

en t

h

e programme

d

starting an

d

en

d

ing time are

ear

l

ier t

h

an t

h

e current time, t

h

e setting wi

ll

not

b

e

accepte

d.

• If the startin

g

time is earlier and the endin

g

time is later

than the current time, the recordin

g

will start ri

g

ht after

[

I

/

yy

ON

/

STANDBY

]

is

p

ressed

.

• “Press ON/STANDBY for timer recordin

g

” will appear on

the TV screen 5 minutes before the pro

g

rammed

startin

g

time

.

The Priorit

y

of Overlapped Setting

s

Note

f

or DVD recordin

g

•

When the recordin

g

time of 2 pro

g

rams are overlapped, or

the end time of a pro

g

ram and the start time of another

pro

g

ram is the same, the first 2 minutes (at the lon

g

est) of

the subsequent pro

g

ram will be cut off

.

•

If the cut-off

p

ortion comes u

p

to 3 minutes or more, this

program wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d

wit

h

errors num

b

er E40 in t

h

e

timer programming

l

ist

.

PROG. A

PROG. B

actual

recording

The ﬁrst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut oﬀ.

PROG. BPROG. A

When the end time of the programming

currently being recorded and the start time

of the subsequent program are same:

The beginning of the PROG. B may be cut oﬀ.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 41E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 41 2009/12/14 18:32:422009/12/14 18:32:42

42

EN

SATELLITE LINK

You can set t

h

e unit to start recor

d

ing w

h

enever it

detects the video si

g

nal

f

rom the external tuner

.

Preparing

f

or the satellite link timer recording

:

Preparation on t

h

e tune

r

•

T

h

e externa

l

tuner s

h

ou

ld

b

e equippe

d

wit

h

some

k

in

d

of timer function. Usin

g

timer function of the tuner, set

it to output audio/video si

g

nals when it comes to the

time

y

ou want to start recording, and stop output audio

/

video signals when it comes to the time

y

ou want to

finish recordin

g

. Refer to the tuner’s manual on how to

set

t

h

e

t

im

e

r

.

•

Make sure to set the satellite link standb

y

mode when

you finish setting

.

Preparation on t

h

is uni

t

•

You must let the unit know which video input jack

y

ou

are usin

g

before makin

g

a recordin

g

.

Refer to “SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO INPUT” on pa

g

e 26

.

1

Se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

recor

d

ing mo

d

e.

(Re

f

er to “Recording Mode” on page

33.

)

2

Press

[

SATELLITE LINK

].

In a secon

d,

t

h

e unit wi

ll

b

e turne

d

into t

h

e

stan

dby

mo

d

e automatica

lly

as it goes into t

h

e

satellite link standb

y

mode

.

T

o

ca

n

ce

l

t

h

e

sate

lli

te

link f

u

n

ct

i

o

n whil

e

in

the satellite link standb

y

mode

:

Pr

ess

[

SATELLITE LINK

]

o

r

[

I/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

.

To cancel the satellite link

f

unction while the

sate

ll

ite

l

in

k

recor

d

ing is in progress

:

Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

STOP

SATELLITE

LINK

N

ot

e

• If the si

g

nal of external input breaks up over 5 seconds, recordin

g

will stop until the si

g

nal of external input comes

back a

g

ain

.

• You cannot set the start or the end time

f

or the satellite link timer recordin

g

on this unit

.

• Recording picture will be distorted i

f

the copy protection signal is being detected during satellite link timer

recor

d

ing

.

• You can record the satellite link b

y

using S-video input jacks on the rear panel. Refer to page 43 for more

i

nf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

.

• When a regular timer recording and the satellite link timer recording are overlapped, those recordings are

r

eco

r

ded

as

ill

ust

r

ated

be

l

o

w

.

e

xamp

l

e

2

actua

l

recor

d

i

n

g

t

i

me

r

recor

d

i

n

g

sate

ll

ite

l

in

k

e

xamp

l

e

3

actua

l

recor

d

i

n

g

t

im

e

r

eco

r

d

i

n

g

sate

ll

ite

l

in

k

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

e

xam

p

le

1

t

i

m

e

r

recor

d

i

n

g

a

ctua

l

reco

r

d

i

n

g

sate

lli

te

link

The rst 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut o.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 42E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 42 2009/12/14 18:32:442009/12/14 18:32:44

43

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE

or

Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:

• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1

• RCA video cable x 1

Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.

C

onnect t

h

e externa

l

d

evice proper

ly

to t

h

e unit

by

using input jac

k

s eit

h

er L2 (Front) or L1 (Rear)

.

When connecting an external device o

f

monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L jack o

f

L2 (Front).

U

se the RCA audio

/

video cables for this connection

.

When connecting a DVC (digital video camcorder), use the DV IN jack on the

f

ront panel instead o

f

VIDEO IN jack.

Co

nn

ect

i

o

n

to

a

n Ex

te

rn

al

D

e

vi

ce

IN OUT

PR/CR

L

R

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO IN

(L1)

S-VIDEO

HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

PCM / BITSTREAM

COAXIAL

IN

L

R

VIDEO

IN

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO IN

(L1)

VIDEO

IN VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

LR

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO L R DV IN

AUDIO OUT DV-OUT

LR

VIDEO

OUT

DV cable

(4-pin)

RCA

video

cable

RCA

audio

cable

L2 L3

or

front of this unit rear of this unit

external device

(camcorder, VCR etc.)

to L2 & L3 to L1

RCA

video

cable

S-video

cable

RCA

audio cable or

L1

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 43E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 43 2009/12/14 18:32:462009/12/14 18:32:46

44

EN

SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE

Recordin

g

f

rom an External Device

1

Turn on t

h

e TV an

d

p

ress

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY]

,

an

d

b

e sure to

select the in

p

ut o

f

the TV to which

t

h

e

u

ni

t

i

s

co

nn

ected.

2

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to o

p

en the disc

tra

y

. Place the disc to record properl

y.

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] a

g

ain to close

t

h

e

d

isc tra

y.

I

t

ta

k

es

a

whil

e

to

l

oad

t

h

e

d

i

sc.

3

Select the input o

f

the unit which the

externa

l

d

evice is connecte

d

. (L1, L2

or DV

(

L3

))

• To use the input

j

acks on the rear of this unit;

Select “L1 (Rear)” b

y

using

[

INPUT SELECT

]

.

• To use the input jacks on the front of this unit;

Se

l

ect “L2 (Front)” or “L3 (DV-IN)“

by

using

[

INPUT SELECT

]

.

4

Press [REC MODE] repeate

dly

to

se

l

ect a recor

d

in

g

mo

d

e

.

Re

f

er to “Recording Mode” on page 33

.

5

Press

[

C

S

TOP] on t

h

e unit to stop

recor

d

ing

.

This operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

6

Start p

l

ay

b

ac

k

on t

h

e externa

l

d

evice

to record

f

rom

.

7

Press

[

I

REC

]

on t

h

e unit to start

recordin

g.

Before recording from an external device, refer to the

instructions

f

or the connection on pa

g

e 43

.

2

5

7

1

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

INPUT

SELEC

T

OPEN/

CLOSE

REC MODE

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 44E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 44 2009/12/14 18:32:472009/12/14 18:32:47

45

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

DV DUBBING

Gui

d

e to DV an

d

On-Screen Disp

l

a

y

T

his function helps

y

ou to easil

y

dub the contents of the DVC

(d

igita

l

vi

d

eo camcor

d

er

)

to

th

i

s

u

ni

t.

You can control basic operations o

f

the DVC

f

rom the remote control o

f

this unit such as playback,

f

ast

f

orward or

reverse and stop all operations if the DVC is in video mode. Use the DV cable that has 4-pin input

j

ack and is

compliance with the IEEE1394 standards. When you connect to DV IN jack on the

f

ront o

f

this unit, select “L3

(DV-IN)” position

by

using

[

INPUT SELECT

]

on t

h

e remote contro

l

an

d

p

ress

[

DISPLAY

]

to s

h

ow t

h

e DV

d

u

bb

ing

i

n

f

ormation

f

or the operation o

f

y

our DVC

.

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

SP 1:00

-

RW VR ORG

Control DVD

DV Audio Stereo1

Start Rec

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

SP 1:00

-

RW VR ORG

2

3

1

4

5

7 6

T

he menu changes according to

wh

at

m

ode

of

DV

C.

S

wi

tch

the

m

ode

o

n

the

DV

C

to

p

layback mode for the dubbing

i

nformation.

W

h

en t

h

e DVC is

in vi

d

eo mo

d

e...

W

h

en t

h

e DVC is not

i

n camera mo

d

e..

.

1. DV

i

co

n

2

.

In

d

i

cato

r

o

f

act

iv

e

de

vi

ce

• W

h

en t

h

e “Contro

l

” is

h

ig

hl

ig

h

te

d

, press

[

ENTER

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e item se

l

ection. Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect t

h

e

d

evice

y

ou

wis

h

to o

p

erate, t

h

en

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

to

acti

v

ate.

• Se

l

ect “DVD” to contro

l

t

h

is unit

.

• Select “DVC” to control

y

our DVC

.

3. Recor

d

ing au

d

io mo

de

• Ot

h

er t

h

an t

h

e DVC is in stop

m

o

d

e, t

h

e “DV Au

d

io” can

b

e

se

l

ecte

d

. Press

[

ENTER

]

to

d

isp

l

ay

t

h

e item se

l

ection an

d

t

h

en use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e au

d

io you

wis

h

to output. Press

[

ENTER

]

aga

i

n to act

i

vate

.

•

Se

l

ect

“

Ste

r

eo

1”

to

dub

t

h

e

ste

r

eo

sou

n

d.

•

Select

“

Ste

r

eo

2”

to

dub

the

sou

n

d

with a

f

ter recordin

g

sound

.

• Se

l

ect “Mix” to

d

u

b

t

h

e stereo1

an

d

stereo2

.

4. Indicator of dubbin

g

functio

n

• When the unit is read

y

f

or

d

u

bb

in

g

, “Start Rec” wi

ll

appear

.

• W

h

en t

h

e unit is in

d

u

bb

ing,

“

Pause Rec” wi

ll

appear

.

5. Channel

p

ositio

n

• W

h

en

y

ou se

l

ect “L3 (DV-IN)”

by

usin

g

[

INPUT SELECT

]

,

“L3

(

DV-IN)” wi

ll

a

pp

ear

.

6. Product name o

f

your DV

C

• If the unit cannot reco

g

nize the

i

nput si

g

nal from the DVC or the

u

nknown

p

roduct, “No Device” or

“

****” will a

pp

ear instead

.

7. Status o

f

the current operation

a

n

d

the

t

im

e

cou

n

ter

Each icon means

(

Available icons

ma

y

var

y

depending on the DVC)

:

DVC is in stop mo

d

e

.

DVC is in p

l

a

yb

ac

k

mo

d

e

.

DVC is in

p

ause mode.

DVC is

f

ast

f

orwarding.

(stan

d

ar

d

spee

d)

DVC is fast forwardin

g

.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is fast forwarding.

(f

aster than above

)

DVC is slow

f

orwarding.

(stan

d

ar

d

spee

d)

DVC is slow forwardin

g

.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is slow forwarding.

(

f

aster than above

)

DVC is

f

ast

f

orwardin

g

.

(

in sto

p

mo

d

e

)

DVC is

f

ast reversing.

(

in stop mo

d

e

)

DVC is fast reversin

g

.

(

standard s

p

eed

)

DVC is

f

ast reversin

g

.

(

faster than above

)

DVC is

f

ast reversing.

(f

aster than above

)

DV

C

i

s

in

s

l

o

w r

e

v

e

r

se

p

la

y

back

.

DVC is in recor

d

in

g.

DVC is in recordin

g

pause

mode.

The

f

ollowing instructions are described with the operations using the remote control o

f

this unit.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 45E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 45 2009/12/14 18:32:482009/12/14 18:32:48

4

6

EN

DV DUBBING

DVC to DVD Du

bb

in

g

Be

f

ore recordin

g

f

rom DVC, see pa

g

e 43

f

or connection

i

n

st

r

uctio

n

s.

2

Press [REC MODE] repeate

dly

to

se

l

ect a recor

d

ing mo

d

e

.

(Re

f

er to “Recording Mode” on page 33.

)

3

Press

[

DISPLAY

]

.

4

With “Control” hi

g

hli

g

hted, press

[ENTER] to displa

y

the available

de

vi

ces

to

co

n

t

r

o

l wi

t

h

t

h

e

r

e

m

ote

control of this unit. Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

select “DVC”, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

L3 (DV-IN)

AB-1234

0:12:34

1/ 1 1/ 1

XP 1:00

-

RW VR ORG

Control DVD

DV Audio Stereo1

Start Rec

Now you can operate your DVC wit

h

t

h

e remote

control o

f

this unit

.

5

Press

[

PLAY

B

]

to start p

l

aying

b

ac

k

the DVC, and

f

ind the point where

you wis

h

to start

d

u

bb

ing.

T

h

en, press [STOP

C

]

w

h

en you come

to t

h

e

d

esire

d

start point

.

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Start Rec”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

T

h

e

d

u

bb

in

g

wi

ll

start

.

7

To stop dubbin

g

;

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Control”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “DVD”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Then

p

ress [STOP

C

]

.

Preparin

g

for DV to DVD dubbin

g:

• Insert a recordable disc and make sure

y

our DVC is in

vi

deo

m

ode.

1

Use

[

INPUT SELECT

]

to select “L3

(

DV-IN

)

”

.

AB-1234

0:00:00

L3 (DV-IN)

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

DISPLA

Y

ENTER

INPUT

SELEC

T

PLAY

REC MODE

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 46E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 46 2009/12/14 18:32:532009/12/14 18:32:53

47

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

DV DUBBING

Note

f

or DV dubbin

g

•

I

f

you press

[

PAUSE

F

]

at step 5, the tape will rewind to the point a

f

ew seconds precedin

g

the paused point

.

•

T

h

e unit

d

oes not sen

d

out t

h

e output signa

l

to DVC

.

•

For the proper operation, connect DVC to the unit directly. Do not connect this unit and DVC via any other unit.

•

D

o

n

ot

co

nn

ect

m

o

r

e

tha

n 1 DV

C.

•

The unit can only accept DVC. Other DV device such as cable/satellite box or D-VHS VCR cannot be recognized

.

•

I

f

no video signal is detected

f

rom the DVC during DVC to DVD dubbing, the recording will be paused and

“

I

” wi

ll

f

lash on the TV screen. The recording will resume when the unit detects the video signal again

.

•

When the DVC is in camera mode, refer to “Guide to DV and On-Screen Displa

y

” on page 45

.

•

You cannot dub

f

rom DVC during timer standb

y

mode

.

•

During timer standby o

f

either component, you cannot select L3(DV-IN) even on the component which is not in

timer stan

db

y

.

•

Date / time and cassette memor

y

data will not be recorded

.

•

Pictures with a cop

y

-guard signal cannot be recorded

.

•

A DV terminal is a terminal that can use the transmission mode con

f

orming to the IEEE 1394 standards called “Fire

W

ire”. It serves as the inter

f

ace that connects the PC and peripheral device such as “i

.

LINK

”

(registere

d

tra

d

emar

k

of

SONY). It enables digital dubbing between DV devices with little degradation

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 47E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 47 2009/12/14 18:32:572009/12/14 18:32:57

4

8

EN

INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK

St

r

uctu

r

e

of

Di

sc

Co

n

te

n

ts

T

he contents o

f

DVD are generall

y

divided into titles, and the titles are subdivided into chapters

.

A

ud

i

o

C

D

s

a

r

e

d

ivi

ded

in

to

t

r

ac

k

s.

Data disc contains MP3/JPEG are divided into folders

,

and the folders are subdivided into files

.

T

itle: Divided contents of a DVD video. Roughl

y

corresponds to a stor

y

title in short stories

.

Cha

p

ter: Divided contents of a title. This corres

p

onds to

a c

h

apter in a stor

y.

T

rack: Divided contents o

f

an audio CD

.

Folder: Divided contents of a MP3

/

JPEG data disc.

Co

n

s

i

sts

o

f n

u

m

be

r

o

f fil

es.

Each title, chapter, or track,

f

older or

f

ile is assi

g

ned a

number, which is called “title number”, “cha

p

ter number”,

“track number”

,

“folder number” or “file number”

respective

ly.

Some

d

iscs may not

h

ave t

h

ese num

b

ers

.

DVD

Titl 1

Title

1

Titl 2

Title

2

C

h

a

p

ter 1 C

h

a

p

ter

2

C

h

a

p

ter

3

Audio CD

Tr

ac

k

2

T

r

ac

k 1 Tr

ac

k

3

T

r

ac

k

4

T

r

ac

k

5

C

h

a

p

ter

1

Ch

a

p

ter 2

f

ile 5

MP3/JPEG

folder 1

folder

1

folder 2

folder

2

f

ile

1

f

ile 2

f

ile

3

f

ile

4

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 48E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 48 2009/12/14 18:32:572009/12/14 18:32:57

49

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

BASIC PLAYBACK

D

irect P

l

a

yb

ac

k

1

Press

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

.

Turn on the TV and be sure to select the in

p

ut to

which the unit is connected

.

2

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to open t

h

e

d

isc tray an

d

insert your

d

isc wit

h

its

label

f

acing up.

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

3

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

] to c

l

ose t

h

e

d

isc tray

.

It ma

y

take awhile to load

t

he disc completel

y.

4

Press

[

PLAY

B

]

to start p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

I

f

you are playing back a DVD-video, a menu

ma

y

appear.

Refer to “Usin

g

the Title/Disc Menu” on pa

g

e 53

.

5

Press

[

STOP

C

] once to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

temporari

l

y

.

• Refer to “Resume Pla

y

back” on page 54

.

N

ot

e

• Some discs ma

y

start pla

y

back automaticall

y.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

OPEN/

CLOSE

PLAY STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 49E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 49 2009/12/14 18:32:582009/12/14 18:32:58

50

EN

BASIC PLAYBACK

2

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to open the

d

isc tray an

d

insert your

d

isc wit

h

its

l

abel

f

acin

g

up

.

Align the disc to

the disc tray guide.

3

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to c

l

ose t

h

e

d

isc tra

y.

It may ta

k

e aw

h

i

l

e to

l

oa

d

th

e

d

isc comp

l

ete

l

y

.

4

Press

[

TOP MENU

]

.

T

it

l

e

l

ist wi

ll

a

pp

ear

.

P

ress

[

MENU/LIST

]

to switch Original/Playlist i

f

ne

c

essar

y

.

•

To exit the title list,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

.

•

To resume t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist,

p

ress

[

TOP MENU

]

.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to select a desired

title, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.

g

.) VR mode DVD-RW ori

g

ina

l

Title List

1 / 6

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 SP

1:00AM (0:12:00) JAN/ 7/10 L1 SP

4 5 6

12 3

ORG

6

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Pla

y

From

S

tart”, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Add To Playlist

7

Press

[

STOP

C

] once to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

temporari

l

y

.

•

Refer to “Resume Pla

y

back” on page 54.

T

o eject t

h

e

d

isc, press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

t

o

open the disc tray, then remove the disc be

f

ore

turning o

ff

the unit

.

Note

• You can a

l

so start p

l

ay

b

ac

k

b

y pressing

[

PLAY

B

]

i

nstead o

f

[

ENTER

]

.

• At step 4,

y

ou can press

[

SKIP

G

]

,

or

p

ress

[

B

]

w

hen the title on the lower ri

g

ht of the title list is

highlighted to displa

y

the next page, and press

[

SKIP

H

]

,

or

p

ress

[

{

]

when the title on the u

pp

er

left of the title list is highlighted to displa

y

the

previous pa

g

e

.

Playback

f

rom the Title List

1

Press

[

I

/

yy

ON/STANDBY

].

T

urn on t

h

e TV an

d

b

e sure to se

l

ect t

h

e input to

w

h

i

ch

the

u

ni

t

i

s

co

nn

ected.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

OPEN/

CLOSE

STOP

TOP MENU MENU/LIS

T

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 50E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 50 2009/12/14 18:32:592009/12/14 18:32:59

5

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

BASIC PLAYBACK

P

laying Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R with MP3/JPEG

f

iles

1

Follow ste

p

s 1 to 2 in “Direct

Pla

y

back” on page 49

.

2

Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to close the

d

isc tra

y.

It ma

y

take awhile to load

t

he disc completel

y.

When an audio CD is inserted

,

track list will

a

pp

ear

.

W

h

en you insert a CD-RW/-R mixe

d

wit

h

MP3

/

J

PEG

f

iles, the pla

y

back media selection screen

w

i

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d.

For MP3, select “Music”,

f

or JPEG, select “Photo”

.

When a CD-RW/-R with MP3/JPEG

f

iles is

i

nserted,

f

ile list will appear

.

• To exit the file list,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

.

•

To

r

esu

me the

f

ile list,

p

ress

[

TOP MENU

]

.

•

P

ress

[

MENU/LIST

]

to ca

ll

up t

h

e p

l

ay

b

ac

k

me

d

ia se

l

ection screen in stop mo

d

e

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired

f

older

or track/

f

ile, then press [ENTER]

.

e.

g

.) JPEG file lis

t

File List

DISC NAME

1/ 2

A

B

JPEG file1

JPEG file2

JPEG file3

JPEG file4

JPEG file5

JPEG file6

N

ot

e

• Th

e

aud

i

o

sou

r

ce

o

f MP

3

fil

es

ca

nn

ot

be

r

eco

r

ded

as

digital sound b

y

an MD or DAT deck

.

• Fi

l

es w

h

ose extension is ot

h

er t

h

an “.mp3(MP3)” or

“

.

j

pg / .

j

peg(JPEG)” wi

ll

not

b

e

l

iste

d

.

• Some unplayable

f

olders or

f

iles may be listed due to

t

h

e recor

d

ing status

.

• High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displa

y

ed

.

• Progressive JPEG

f

iles (JPEG

f

iles saved in progressive

f

ormat) cannot be pla

y

ed back on this unit.

• T

h

e JPEG pictures can a

l

so rotate

b

y using

[

s

/

B

].

W

hen selecting track/

f

ile:

Pl

a

yb

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

W

hen selecting

f

older

:

T

he

f

iles in the

f

older will appear

.

U

se

[

K

/

L

]

to select the

f

ile or

f

older you want to play

b

ac

k

, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

•

P

ress

[

PLAY

B

]

,

[

ENTER

]

or

[

B

]

to move to any

l

ower

h

ierarc

h

ies

.

•

P

ress

[

s

]

or

[

RETURN

]

to move

b

ac

k

to t

h

e previous

h

ierarc

h

y

.

H

ints

f

or audio CD tracks and MP3 / JPEG

f

iles

:

• Folders are shown b

y

.

• Au

d

io CD trac

k

s are s

h

own

b

y

.

• MP3

f

iles are shown by

3

.

• JPEG files are shown b

y

.

• The s

y

stem can recognize up to 255

f

olders and, up to

99 tracks

/

999

f

iles

.

• Letters o

f

a

f

ile/

f

older name over

f

lowing the given space

wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d

as “…”.

•

If there are no files in the folder, “No Files” will be displa

y

ed

.

I

t is recommended that files to be pla

y

ed back in this

u

nit are recorded under the followin

g

specifications

:

<

M

P

3

>

• Sampling

f

requency : 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

• Constant

b

it rate : 112

kb

ps - 320

kb

ps

.

<

JPE

G>

• Upper

l

imit : 6,300 x 5,100

d

ots.

• Lower

l

imit : 32 x 32

d

ots

.

• File size o

f

image maximum : 12 MB

.

T

h

is DVD Vi

d

eo Recor

d

er requires

d

iscs/recor

d

ings to

meet certain tec

h

nica

l

stan

d

ar

d

s in or

d

er to ac

h

ieve

optimal playback quality. There are many di

ff

erent types

o

f

recordable disc

f

ormats (includin

g

CD-R containin

g

MP3

f

iles). Not all recordable discs will operate or

pro

d

uce optima

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

qua

l

ity. T

h

e tec

h

nica

l

criteria

set

f

orth in this owner's manual are meant only as a

guide. Use o

f

CD-RW

f

or MP3

f

iles is not recommended

.

You must obtain an

y

required permission from

cop

y

right owners to download or use cop

y

righted

content. Toshiba cannot and does not

g

rant such

p

ermission

.

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAYPAU SE STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

OPEN/

CLOSE

STOP

TOP MENU MENU/LIS

T

PLAY

RETURN

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 51E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 51 2009/12/14 18:33:012009/12/14 18:33:01

5

2

EN

BASIC PLAYBACK

1

In stop mode, plug

y

our USB

f

lash

memor

y.

File t

y

pe selection screen will appear

.

DISC

USB

Title List

Music

Photo

2

Select the desired file t

y

pe using

[

K

/

L

]

, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

•

I

f

y

ou want to change the media t

y

pe, press

[

{

]

.

S

elect the desired media t

y

pe using

[

K

/

L

]

,

th

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

(

You can a

l

so access t

h

e

m

edia t

y

pe selection screen

f

rom the “Title

L

ist” in the “Setu

p

” menu in sto

p

mode.

)

•

Music: T

h

e MP3 Fi

l

e List wi

ll

appear.

•

Photo: The JPEG File List will a

pp

ear

.

3

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e step 3 in “P

l

aying Bac

k

an

Au

d

io CD or a CD-RW/-R wit

h

MP3

/

J

PEG

f

iles” on page 51

.

N

ote

f

o

r

US

B

de

vi

ce

USB device re

q

uirements

:

• USB version 2.0 (Fu

ll

Spee

d

)

.

•

US

B

de

vi

ces

f

o

rm

atted

wi

t

h

t

h

e

FAT1

6

a

n

d

FAT

3

2 fil

e

s

y

stems are supported

.

• Up to 8 characters (excludin

g

the extension) are

displa

y

ed as a file and folder names. 9 or more

c

h

aracters cannot

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d.

Compati

bl

e

d

evice

:

• USB flash memor

y

(maximum size : 32GB

)

Incom

p

atible device

:

• USB

h

u

b

•

US

B

de

vi

ce

wi

t

h inn

e

r h

ub

• P

C

•

Ca

m

e

r

as

• Devices t

h

at nee

d

to insta

ll

d

river

s

(e.g. some MP3 p

l

ayers

)

Pla

y

ing Back a USB Device with MP3 / JPEG

f

iles

N

ote

• T

h

e unit cannot p

l

ay

b

ac

k

a USB

d

evice at t

h

e

f

ollowing condition

.

- During the operation o

f

the disc tray

.

- Durin

g

the disc loadin

g

, DVD recordin

g

, DVD/CD

pla

y

back, editing or dubbing

.

- While “Title List” or “File List” of disc is displa

y

ed

.

- W

h

i

l

e “Setup” or “Timer Programming” menu is

d

isp

l

aye

d.

• D

o

n

ot

d

i

sco

nn

ect

t

h

e

US

B

de

vi

ce

whil

e

t

h

e

in

d

i

cato

r

o

n the device is flickerin

g.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 52E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 52 2009/12/14 18:33:032009/12/14 18:33:03

53

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

BASIC PLAYBACK

Usin

g

t

h

e Tit

l

e/Disc Menu

DVD may contain a title list, which describes the contents

o

f the disc, or a disc menu, which guides

y

ou through the

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

s

in

t

h

e

d

i

sc.

1) Press [TOP MENU] or [MENU/LIST] to ca

ll

up t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist or

d

isc menu

.

2)

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to ma

k

e a se

l

ection, an

d

t

h

en

press [ENTER] to ena

bl

e your se

l

ection

.

3)

Press [

S

T

O

P

C

]

to exit t

h

e

d

isc menu.

1) During p

l

a

yb

ac

k

, press [PAUSE

F

]

.

Playback will be paused and sound will be muted

.

F

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

N

ote

•

You can se

l

ect a num

b

ere

d

menu wit

h

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

a

l

so

.

•

Menus var

y

among discs. Refer to the information

a

ccompan

y

ing the disc for details

.

•

[

MENU/LIST

]

o

r

[

TOP MENU

]

will not alwa

y

s be

e

ff

ect

iv

e

f

o

r

a

ll DVD

s.

N

ot

e

• For DVD, set “Still Mode” to “Field” in “Pla

y

back”

menu if

p

ictures in the

p

ause mode are blurred.

(Refer to pa

g

e 86.

)

Pause

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 53E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 53 2009/12/14 18:33:052009/12/14 18:33:05

54

EN

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

You can s

k

ip TV commercia

l

s to enjo

y

t

h

e recor

d

e

d

pro

g

rams wit

h

out interruptin

g.

D

uring pla

y

back, press [INSTANT SKIP]

.

Normal pla

y

back will start at 30 seconds ahead from

w

h

ere

y

ou press

[

INSTANT SKIP

]

.

Every t

i

me you press

[

INSTANT SKIP

]

, t

h

e searc

h

ing

point wi

ll

b

e exten

d

e

d

b

y 30 secon

d

s a

h

ea

d.

Y

ou can

p

ress

[

INSTANT SKIP

]

up

to 6 times (180 seconds).

e.

g

.

)

Press

[

INSTANT SKIP

]

o

n

ce.

B

Instant Skip 30sec.

(forwardin

g

30 seconds

)

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

You can pla

y

back

f

rom where

y

ou stopped pla

y

ing bac

k

t

h

e

d

i

sc

l

ast.

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [STOP

C

]

.

The resume messa

g

e will appear

.

Resume ON

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

].

In a

f

ew seconds, pla

y

back

will resume from the point

k

at w

h

ic

h

it stoppe

d

l

ast. You can resume p

l

a

y

back

at

k

the same point even i

f

you turn the unit into the

stan

db

y mo

d

e

.

To cancel the resume pla

y

back

and start playing back

k

the disc from the be

g

innin

g

, press

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

ain

while the pla

y

back

is stopped.

k

Resume P

l

ay

b

ac

k

Note

• For MP3/JPEG

f

iles, playback will resume

f

rom the

beginning o

f

the

f

ile at which playback was stopped

.

• For USB devices, the

f

ile list will appear at step 1

)

.

-

Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

ain to exit from the file list.

-

P

ress

[

PLAY

B

]

to resume p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

Note

• Forwar

d

/reverse spee

d

wi

ll

b

e in

d

icate

d

wit

h

icons

as

f

ollows

.

f

orward (approx. speed)

2x

:

20

x:

4

0

x:

reverse (a

pp

rox. s

p

eed)

5

x

:

20

x:

4

0

x

:

1) During pla

y

back, press [FWD

D

]

or

[

REV

E

].

Ever

y

time

y

ou press

[

FWD

D

]

or

[

REV

E

]

,

approximate speed will be chan

g

ed as follows.

Fast

f

orward or

f

ast reverse playback across titles (

f

or

DVD), or

f

iles (

f

or MP3

f

iles) is not possible

.

20x

normal

speed

playback

2x 20x5x 40x40x

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

For audio CD or MP3 files, a

pp

roximate s

p

eed is fixed

at

8

x wi

t

h

sou

n

d.

2)

Press

[

P

LAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Pla

y

bac

k

S

k

ip

pi

ng

TV Commercials Duri

ng

Pl

a

yb

ac

k

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 54E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 54 2009/12/14 18:33:062009/12/14 18:33:06

55

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

R

apid playback

f

unction is available only during

pl

a

yb

ac

k.

T

his function is available onl

y

on discs recorded in the

Dolb

y

Digital format, and pla

y

s back in a slightl

y

faster

/

slower speed while keepin

g

the sound output

.

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press

[

1.3X

/

0.8X PLA

Y

].

B

x0

.

8

:

P

ress

[

1.3X / 0.8X PLAY

]

once

d

uring p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

P

lays back approximately at 0.8 times o

f

normal

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

B

x

1.

3

:

P

ress

[

1.3X / 0.8X PLAY

]

twice

d

uring p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

P

lays back approximately at 1.3 times o

f

normal

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

B

:

P

ress

[

1.3X

/

0.8X PLA

Y

]

th

rice to p

l

ay

b

ac

k

in

norma

l

spee

d.

N

o e

ff

ects

.

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

R

api

d

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

N

ot

e

• Audio (lan

g

ua

g

e) settin

g

cannot be chan

g

ed while

usin

g

this mode

.

• This

f

eature may not work at some point in a disc

.

• Au

d

io is LPCM (2 c

h

anne

l

)

d

uring rapi

d

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

Step

by

Step P

l

a

yb

ac

k

1) During pla

y

back, press [PAUSE

F

]

.

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

wi

ll

b

e pause

d

an

d

soun

d

wi

ll

b

e mute

d.

2

)

Press [SKIP

i

] repeatedl

y.

Pla

y

back will advance one

f

rame at a time when

y

ou

p

ress

[

SKIP

i

]

wi

t

h

t

h

e

sou

n

d

m

uted.

T

o p

l

ay

b

ac

k

step

b

y step

b

ac

k

war

d:

Pr

ess

[

SKIP

j

]

repeatedl

y.

Ever

y

time

y

ou press t

h

e

b

utton, t

h

e p

l

a

yb

ac

k

wi

ll

go

backward by one

f

rame

.

•

Press an

d

h

o

ld

[

SKIP

j

]

/

[

SKIP

i

]

to reverse

/

ad

vance continuous

l

y

.

3

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

N

ote

• Forwar

d

/reverse s

p

ee

d

wi

ll

b

e in

d

icate

d

wit

h

icons

as

fo

ll

o

w

s.

f

orward (approx. speed

)

1

/

16x:

1

/

8x:

1

/

3x:

reverse (a

pp

rox. s

p

eed

)

1

/

16x:

1

/

8x:

1

/

4x:

Sl

ow Forwar

d

/ S

l

ow Reverse P

l

a

yb

ac

k

1

) During playback, press [PAUSE

F

]

. Then press

[

FW

D

] or

[

R

EV

E

]

.

Ever

y

time

y

ou press

[

FWD

D

]

o

r

[

REV

E

]

,

a

pproximate speed will be chan

g

ed as follows. (The

sound will remain muted.

)

1/8x

pause

1/16x 1/8x1/16x 1/3x1/4x

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

REV

FWD

2

)

Press [PLAY

B

] to return to t

h

e norma

l

p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 55E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 55 2009/12/14 18:33:092009/12/14 18:33:09

56

EN

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

Zoom

N

ote

• When selecting a smaller

f

actor than the current one,

t

h

e zoom area wi

ll

not

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d.

• To exit t

h

e zoom menu, press

[

RETURN

]

repeate

dl

y.

• To cancel the zoom function, select “x1.0” usin

g

[

K

/

L

]

, then

p

res

s

[

ENTER

]

at ste

p

3.

• You cannot s

l

i

d

e t

h

e zoome

d

picture on some JPEG

f

il

es.

1) During p

l

a

yb

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] or [ZOOM]

.

•

I

f

you press

[

ZOOM

]

, s

k

ip to step 3

.

2)

Use [

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect

men

u

.

e.

g

.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select a desired zoom

f

actor to zoom,

t

h

en press [ENTER].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

× 1.2

× 1.5

× 2.0

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

Zoom menu will a

pp

ear

.

There are

f

our options

(x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 an

d

x2.0), t

h

ese are

d

isp

l

aye

d

exc

l

u

d

ing t

h

e current zoom rate

.

Zoom area wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d.

4)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

zoom

position, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Zoom p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

T

his

f

eature allows

y

ou to assign a speci

f

ic point on a disc

to

be

ca

ll

ed

bac

k l

ate

r

.

1

) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the

displa

y

menu

.

If the displa

y

menu is alread

y

shown, skip to step 2.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select to displa

y

the marker list

.

e.

g

.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

mar

k

er num

b

er.

W

h

en it reac

h

es t

h

e

d

esire

d

point, press [ENTER]

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

---

1

2

3

4

5

6

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

T

he title (track) number and the time will be displa

y

ed

.

4)

To return to t

h

e mar

k

er

:

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

mar

k

er num

b

e

r

,

th

en pres

s

[

ENTER

]

.

Mar

k

er Settin

g

N

ote

• To c

l

ear a mar

k

er, se

l

ect t

h

e mar

k

er num

b

er to

b

e

c

l

eare

d

, t

h

en press

[

CLEAR

]

.

• All markers will be erased when

y

ou operate these

o

p

erations listed below

.

– Opening t

h

e

d

isc tra

y

– Turning t

h

e unit into t

h

e stan

db

y mo

de

– Recordin

g

on a recordable dis

c

• You can mar

k

up to 6 points

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 56E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 56 2009/12/14 18:33:132009/12/14 18:33:13

5

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

C

hasing Pla

y

back during Recordin

g

Note

•

Pla

y

back image ma

y

freeze momentaril

y

using this

f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

.

However, this does not affect the recordin

g.

•

The 2x

f

ast

f

orward playback is not available.

•

[

REC

I

]

is not available durin

g

this function

.

•

You must cancel this function first b

y

pressing

[

STOP

C

]

once. Then

y

ou can use

[

REC

I

]

to

use

OTR (one-touch timer recordin

g

) function or chan

g

e

recordin

g

time

f

or the OTR

.

•

“Wait

f

or a moment.” will be displayed on the screen

i

f

you press

[

PLAY

B

]

be

f

ore 1 minute o

f

recording

.

•

This function is available onl

y

when

y

ou are

recordin

g

on a DVD-RW in VR mode, with the

recordin

g

mode LP, EP or SLP

.

You can play back the already recorded part o

f

the

currentl

y

recording program without waiting for the

recor

d

ing to t

h

e en

d

.Thi

s

fu

n

ct

i

o

n w

o

rk

s

f

r

o

m 1

m

inute a

f

ter the start o

f

the recordin

g.

1) Durin

g

recor

d

in

g

, press [PLAY

B

]

.

Playback will start

f

rom the beginning o

f

the program

t

h

at you are current

l

y recor

d

ing

.

Screen for the current pla

y

back

:

6/ 6 1/ 1 0:01:00 / 1:23:45

-

RW VR ORG

LP 1:01Resume ON

If

y

ou pla

y

back the fast forward pla

y

back and the

playback reaches the scene recorded 1 minute be

f

ore,

the

f

orwarding pla

y

back will automaticall

y

return to

t

h

e norma

l

p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

2

)

Press [STOP

C

]

once to stop p

l

ay

b

ac

k

.

T

he resume messa

g

e will appear

.

Screen for the current recordin

g:

L1 (Rear)

611:23:45

LP 1:01Resume ON

-

RW VR ORG

T

o stop recor

d

ing, press

[

STOP

C

]

aga

i

n

.

T

o cancel the resume,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

ain.

Us

i

n

g

[TIME SLIP] ..

.

W

i

t

h

[

TIME SLIP

]

,

even if

y

ou leave

y

our couch while

y

ou are watching TV through this unit,

y

ou can come

back and watch rest of the pro

g

ram from ri

g

ht where

y

ou left at an

y

convenient time with just one button.

Please make sure to

p

ut VR mode DVD-RW disc, and set

the recordin

g

mode to LP, EP or SLP

.

1

) W

h

i

l

e viewing a TV

b

roa

d

cast via t

h

is unit, press

[

TIME SLIP

].

Thi

s

u

ni

t

sta

r

t

to

r

eco

r

d

t

h

e

TV

b

r

oadcast.

2) Press [TIME SLIP] aga

i

n

.

Pla

y

back will start from the point at which

y

ou press

[

TIME SLIP

]

first while recordin

g

continues

.

• W

h

i

l

e viewing t

h

e recor

d

e

d

content, you can pause

an

d

resume t

h

e p

l

a

yb

ac

k

by

pressing

[

TIME SLIP

]

.

3

)

Press [STOP

C

] once to stop pla

y

back

.

T

o stop recor

d

in

g

, press

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

a

i

n

.

T

o cancel the resume,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

ain

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 57E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 57 2009/12/14 18:33:152009/12/14 18:33:15

58

EN

You can also pla

y

back a recorded title during current

recor

d

ing or t

h

e timer recor

d

ing on t

h

e same

d

isc

.

1) Durin

g

recor

d

in

g

, press [DISPLAY]

.

Screen

f

or the current recording

:

L1 (Rear)

311:23:45

-

RW VR ORG

2

)

Select

{

/

{

B

], then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

T

he

t

i

tle

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

wi

ll

b

e

h

i

ghl

i

gh

te

d.

T

i

t

l

e:

Enter a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e num

b

er to searc

h

usin

g

[

K

/

L

] or [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons], t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Se

l

ecte

d

tit

l

e p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

C

h

a

p

ter

:

T

o move to

f

or chapter, press

[

B

]

.

Enter a desired chapter number to search usin

g

[

K

/

L

] or [the Number buttons], then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Se

l

ecte

d

c

h

apter p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

If

y

ou pla

y

back the currentl

y

recording program and the

pla

y

back reaches the scene recorded 1 minute before,

t

he forwarding pla

y

back will automaticall

y

return to the

normal pla

y

back

.

Simu

l

taneous P

l

ay

b

ac

k

an

d

Recor

d

in

g

SPECIAL PLAYBACK

C

] once to stop p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

T

he resume messa

g

e will appear

.

Screen for the current recordin

g:

L1 (Rear)

311:30:25

LP 1:01Resume ON

-

RW VR ORG

T

o stop recor

d

ing, press

[

STOP

C

]

aga

i

n.

T

o cancel the resume,

p

ress

[

STOP

C

]

a

g

ain

.

N

ot

e

• Playback image may

f

reeze momentarily using this

f

unction

.

H

owever, this does not a

ff

ect the recording

.

• The 2x fast forward pla

y

back is not available

.

•

T

his function is available onl

y

when

y

ou are

r

ecor

d

in

g

on a DVD-RW in VR mo

d

e, wit

h

t

h

e

r

ecor

d

in

g

mo

d

e LP, EP or SLP

.

• On

l

y t

h

e tit

l

es (c

h

apters) in t

h

e origina

l

can

b

e

s

e

l

ecte

d.

Y

ou cannot select titles

f

rom the title list

.

• When

y

ou stop the pla

y

back after the timer

r

ecordin

g

is completed, the unit will be switched to

t

he timer standb

y

mode if another program has been

s

et (refer to “Hints for Timer Recordin

g

” on pa

g

e 41)

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 58E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 58 2009/12/14 18:33:162009/12/14 18:33:16

5

9

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SEARCH

Us

i

n

g

[SKIP

j

]

/

[

SKIP

i

]

1) During pla

y

back, press [SKIP

i

] to ski

p

the

current title or cha

p

ter and move to the next

.

T

he title or chapter will move

f

orward by one at a time

.

•

I

f

there is no chapter in one title, the current title will

b

e s

k

ippe

d

.

T

o

g

o back to the be

g

innin

g

of the current title or

c

ha

p

ter,

p

ress

[

SKIP

j

]

.

Press it twice in quic

k

successions to

g

o to t

h

e previous

title or cha

p

ter. The title or cha

p

ter will move

back

w

a

r

d

o

n

e

t

i

tle

at

a

t

im

e.

Us

i

n

g

[DISPLAY

]

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to select

e

.

g

.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

The

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

wi

ll

b

e

h

i

ghl

i

gh

te

d.

3

)

Title

:

U

se

[

K

/

L

] or [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e num

b

er to searc

h

,

t

h

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

T

it

l

e searc

h

wi

ll

start

.

C

h

apter

:

Press

[

B

] to move to t

h

e num

b

er next to

f

or

c

h

apter.

U

se

[

K

/

L

]

or

[

the Number buttons

]

to enter a

d

esire

d

c

h

a

p

ter num

b

er to searc

h

, t

h

en

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Af

ter the search, playback will start automatically

.

Tit

l

e/C

h

apter Searc

h

Note

• In search mode displa

y

, total numbers of each search

contents (title/chapter/time) are shown as a

de

n

o

min

ato

r

.

1/ 5 1/ 5 0:01:00 / 1:23:45

DVD

Video

tota

l n

u

m

be

r

o

f

t

i

t

l

es

tota

l n

u

m

be

r

of cha

p

ter

s

tota

l

t

im

e

o

f

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e

/

U

s

i

n

g

[SKIP

j

]

/

[

SKIP

i

]

1

) During pla

y

back, press [SKIP

i

]

to ski

p

the

current track

/

file and move to the next

.

T

he track/

f

ile will move

f

orward one at a time

.

T

o go back to the beginning o

f

the current track/

f

ile,

press

[

SKIP

j

]

.

(For JPEG files, press it once to

g

o to the previous file.

)

Press it twice in quic

k

successions to go to t

h

e previous

t

rack/

f

ile. The track/

f

ile will move backward one at a

ti

m

e.

Tr

ack

Sea

r

ch

Note

• During CD p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, you can enter a trac

k

num

b

er

d

irect

l

y using [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

f

or track search

wit

h

out

d

isp

l

aying t

h

e menu

.

U

s

i

ng [DISPLAY

]

1

) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] to

b

ring up t

h

e

d

isp

l

ay menu.

If

the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect

e.g.) au

d

io C

D

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

e.g.) MP3

f

ile

s

1/ 5 0:00:15

MP3

T

h

e

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

will be hi

g

hli

g

hted

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

or

[

the Number buttons

]

to enter a

desired track/

f

ile number to search, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

A

f

ter the search, playback will start automatically

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 59E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 59 2009/12/14 18:33:182009/12/14 18:33:18

60

EN

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] to

b

ring up t

h

e

d

isp

l

ay menu

.

I

f

the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2

.

2)

Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to se

l

ect

e.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5 0:01:00 / 1:23:45

DVD

Video

e.g.) au

d

io C

D

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

Th

e

n

u

m

be

r n

e

x

t

to

will be hi

g

hli

g

hted

.

To move to t

h

e num

b

er next to ,

press

[

B

]

.

Wh

en time searc

h

is not avai

l

a

bl

e

,

a

n

d

t

im

e

counter are not displa

y

ed

.

3)

Use [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

or

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

to

enter a desired time to search, then

p

ress [ENTER].

A

f

ter the search, playback will start automatically

.

N

ot

e

• Time search is available onl

y

in the same track, file or

t

i

t

l

e.

Tim

e

Sea

r

c

h

SEARCH

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 60E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 60 2009/12/14 18:33:202009/12/14 18:33:20

6

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW

R

epeat P

l

a

yb

ac

k

Ran

d

om P

l

a

yb

ac

k

Available repeat

f

unction may vary depending the discs

.

1) During p

l

a

yb

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] or [REPEAT] to

bring up the display menu

.

If the displa

y

menu is alread

y

shown, skip to step 2

.

•

I

f

you press

[

REPEAT

],

s

k

ip to step 3.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to select to displa

y

the selection

m

e

n

u.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select a desired o

p

tion to re

p

eat,

t

hen

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Th

e se

l

ecte

d

repeat p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start.

e.

g

.) DVD-video

OFF

Title

Chapter

A - B

e

.

g

.) audio C

D

Track

All

A - B

OFF

e

.

g

.) MP3/JPEG

f

ile

s

Track

All

Group

OFF

Ti

t

l

e:

T

he current title will be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

C

h

apter

:

T

h

e current c

h

apter wi

ll

b

e p

l

aye

d

b

ac

k

repeate

dl

y.

A

ll

:

Th

e current

d

isc wi

ll

b

e p

l

a

y

e

d

b

ac

k

repeate

dly.

A

-B

:

Desired section can be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y.

1)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “A-B”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

2

)

Press

[

ENTER

]

at the desired startin

g

point A.

3

)

Press

[

ENTER

]

at the desired endin

g

point B.

Trac

k:

T

he current track or

f

ile will be played back repeatedly

.

Grou

p:

T

he current folder will be pla

y

ed back repeatedl

y

.

You can pla

y

back a disc randoml

y

instead of pla

y

ing

back in the ori

g

inal order

.

1

) Press [SETUP] in stop mo

d

e

.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “DISC Pla

y

back Mode”, then

p

ress [ENTER].

“DISC Playback Mode” menu will appear

.

For MP3, use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Music”, t

h

en press

[

ENTE

R

]

.

For JPEG

,

use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Photo”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Ran

d

om P

l

ay”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Random pla

y

back will start

.

e.

g

.) audio C

D

1/ 5 0:00:15 / 0:05:00

Random

CD

N

ot

e

• To cancel random pla

y

back, press

[

STOP

C

]

t

wi

ce

during random pla

y

back. “OFF” appears on the

displa

y

menu

.

• For USB devices, select “Random Pla

y

”in

“USB Pla

y

back Mode”

.

Note

• Point B

f

or the repeat A-B playback should be set

within the same title or track of

p

oint A

.

• To cancel the repeat playback, select “OFF” at step 3.

T

h

e repeat setting wi

ll

a

l

so

b

e cance

l

e

d

w

h

en

y

ou

stop pla

y

back

.

• You cannot se

l

ect “Group”

d

uring t

h

e ran

d

om

playback o

f

MP3/JPEG

f

iles

.

• Cha

p

ter/Track re

p

eat will be canceled whenever a

Cha

p

ter/Track is ski

pp

ed forward or backward

.

• During the A-B repeat, if

y

ou reaches the point A

with an

y

reverse pla

y

back, the reverse pla

y

back will

b

e cance

l

e

d

an

d

t

h

e A-B repeat p

l

a

yb

ac

k

resumes

f

rom

p

oint A

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 61E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 61 2009/12/14 18:33:212009/12/14 18:33:21

6

2

EN

Program P

l

ay

b

ac

k

• To erase tracks

y

ou selected, press

[

CLEAR

]

at ste

p

4

.

• You can make pro

g

ram settin

g

s up to 50 tracks

.

• To cance

l

program p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press

[

STOP

C

]

tw

i

ce

d

uring program p

l

ay

b

ac

k

. “OFF” appears on t

h

e TV

screen.

• You ma

y

also select a desired track using

[

the

Number buttons

]

at ste

p

4

.

REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW

You can program the disc to pla

y

back in

y

our desired

o

r

de

r

.

1) Press [SETUP] in sto

p

mode

.

2)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “DISC Pla

y

back Mode”, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

“

DISC P

l

a

yb

ac

k

Mo

d

e” menu wi

ll

appear

.

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Program Pla

y

”, then press

[

ENTER

].

4)

Use [

K

/

L

] to select a desired track, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

or

[

B

]

.

DISC Playback Mode

Program Play

0:00:00Total

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Repeat this step until

y

ou program all the desired

t

r

ac

k

s.

5)

Press [PLAY

B

].

DISC Playback Mode

Program Play

0:31:07Total

09 04 10 06 -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Program p

l

ay

b

ac

k

wi

ll

start

.

Sl

i

de

Sho

w

You can select the displa

y

time between 5 seconds and

1

0

seco

n

ds.

1

) Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Program Pla

y

back” on the

l

e

f

t.

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “P

h

oto”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “S

l

i

d

e S

h

ow”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

4

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

isp

l

ay time, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

5) Press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

N

ote

• Large-size JPEG

f

iles take a

f

ew moments to be

d

isp

l

aye

d.

• For USB

d

evices, se

l

ect “S

l

i

d

e S

h

ow” i

n

“USB P

l

ay

b

ac

k

Mo

d

e”

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 62E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 62 2009/12/14 18:33:232009/12/14 18:33:23

63

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

DVD-vi

d

eo ma

y

h

ave su

b

tit

l

es in one or more

l

anguages.

Available subtitle languages can be found on the disc

case. You can switch subtitle languages during pla

y

back

.

1) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

a

y

t

h

e se

l

ection

menu

.

e

.

g

.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

su

b

tit

l

e

l

anguage,

th

en press [ENTER]

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

OFF

1.English

Video

Su

b

tit

l

e wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d

in t

h

e se

l

ecte

d

l

anguage

.

When “OFF” is selected, subtitle will disa

pp

ear

.

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO

Switc

h

in

g

Su

b

tit

l

es

Note

• Some discs will onl

y

allow

y

ou to change the subtitle

fr

o

m

t

h

e

d

i

sc

m

e

n

u.

Pr

ess

[

MENU/LIST

]

or

[

TOP MENU

]

to displa

y

the disc menu.

• I

f

a 4-digit language code appears in the subtitle

menu, re

f

er to the “LANGUAGE CODE” on page 97

.

You can select the

f

ormat o

f

audio and video as you pre

f

er depending on the contents o

f

the disc you are playing back.

Wh

en p

l

a

y

ing

b

ac

k

a DVD-vi

d

eo recor

d

e

d

wit

h

2 or more

soundtracks (these are often in different languages),

y

ou

can switch them during pla

y

back

.

Wh

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

au

d

io CD, you can switc

h

“L/R”(stereo),

“L”(le

f

t) or “R”(right)

.

1

) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY] or [AUDIO

]

to

b

ring up the displa

y

menu

.

I

f the displa

y

menu is alread

y

shown, skip to step 2.

•

I

f

you press

[

A

UDI

O

],

s

k

ip to step3

.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e se

l

ection

men

u

.

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

au

d

io soun

d

trac

k

or

au

d

io c

h

anne

l

, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

F

o

r DVD-vi

deo

o

r VR m

ode

DVD-R

W

•

Au

d

io soun

d

trac

k

wi

ll

switc

h.

e.

g

.) DVD-video

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

1.Dolby Digital 2ch English

2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English

Video

•

If the title contains both main and sub audio,

y

ou can

further select “L“ (main)

,

“R“ (sub)

,

“L/R“ (mixed o

f

main and sub

).

For au

d

io CD

•

A

ud

i

o

c

h

a

nn

e

l will

s

wi

tc

h

.

e.

g

.) audio CD

1/ 5

CD

0:00:15 / 0:05:00

2. L

3. R

1. L/R

Switc

h

in

g

Au

d

io Soun

d

trac

k

N

ote

• Some

d

iscs wi

ll

on

ly

a

ll

ow

y

ou to c

h

ange t

h

e

s

oundtrack

f

rom the disc menu. Press

[

MENU/LIST

]

or

[

TOP MENU

]

to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e

d

isc menu

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 63E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 63 2009/12/14 18:33:242009/12/14 18:33:24

64

EN

You can enjo

y

stereophonic virtual space through

y

our

e

xisting 2 channel stereo s

y

stem

.

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY] to

b

ring up t

h

e

d

isp

l

a

y

menu.

I

f

the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2

.

2)

Use [

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e se

l

ection

men

u

.

e.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect

“

O

FF

”

,

“

T

ype 1

”

or

“

T

ype 2

”

,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

e.g.) DVD-vi

d

e

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

OFF

Type 1

Type 2

Video

O

FF

:

n

o

e

ff

ect

Ty

pe 1 : n

atu

r

a

l

e

ff

ect

T

ype 2 : emphasized e

ff

ect

N

ot

e

•

Se

l

ect

“

O

FF” if

sou

n

d

i

s

d

i

sto

r

ted.

• The setting will be kept when the unit is turned off

.

Switc

h

ing Virtua

l

Surroun

d

Syste

m

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO

Switc

h

in

g

Camera An

gl

e

s

R

educin

g

Block Noi

se

So

m

e

DVD-vi

deo

h

a

v

e

sce

n

es

s

h

ot

f

r

o

m

t

w

o

r m

o

r

e

an

g

les. An

g

le in

f

ormation should be on the disc case i

f

t

h

e

d

isc contains mu

l

ti-ang

l

e scenes

.

1

) During pla

y

back, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

]

to select , then

p

ress [ENTER].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

Ang

l

e icon appears w

h

en a switc

h

ing camera ang

l

e is avai

l

a

bl

e

.

Angle will switch each time

y

ou press

[

ENTER

].

1

) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use

[

{

/

{

B

] to se

l

ect to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e se

l

ection

men

u

.

e.

g

.) DVD-vide

o

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

,

select

“

N

o

i

se

R

educt

i

o

n

”

, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Noise Reduction OFF

Black Level OFF

Video

4)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

option, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

]

.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

OFF

Type 1

Type 2

Video

T

his function reduces noise in the pla

y

back picture. I

f

noises appear on the TV screen during pla

y

ing bac

k

discs recorded in lon

g

time recordin

g

mode such as EP

or SLP, select “T

y

pe 1” or “T

y

pe 2”

.

(“T

y

pe 2” is more e

ff

ective.

)

When playing back discs with a

f

ew noises such as

DVD-vi

d

eo, se

l

ect “OFF”

.

N

ote

• Angle icon does not appear on the TV screen if

y

ou

s

et “Ang

l

e Icon” to “OFF” in “P

l

a

yb

ac

k

” menu

.

R

efer to pa

g

e 86.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 64E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 64 2009/12/14 18:33:262009/12/14 18:33:26

65

EN

Disc

Management Recording Playback

Introduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

You can a

dj

ust t

h

e

bl

ac

k

l

eve

l

to contro

l

t

h

e

b

rig

h

tness

o

f

the picture in order to

g

et a better picture.

1) During p

l

ay

b

ac

k

, press [DISPLAY]

.

2

)

Use [

{

/

{

B

]

to select to displa

y

the selection

m

e

n

u.

e

.g.) DVD-vi

d

eo

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Video

3

)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “B

l

ac

k

Leve

l

”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

Noise Reduction OFF

Black Level OFF

Video

4)

Use [

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “OFF” or “ON”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

1/ 5 1/ 5

DVD

0:01:00 / 1:23:45

OFF

Video

ON

O

FF : S

h

ows t

h

e origina

l

picture as recor

d

e

d.

O

N

:

Make the darker

p

arts of the

p

icture more

vi

s

i

b

l

e.

Note

• You can a

d

just

bl

ac

k

l

eve

l

setting on

ly

d

uring

p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

• T

h

e setting wi

ll

b

e

k

ept even w

h

en t

h

e unit is turne

d

o

ff.

• The default settin

g

is “ON”.

A

dj

usting B

l

ac

k

Leve

l

SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 65E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 65 2009/12/14 18:33:292009/12/14 18:33:29

66

EN

INFORMATION ON DISC EDITING

G

u

i

de

to

a

Ti

tle

Li

st

Ed

itin

g

Disc

s

T

it

l

e

l

ist a

ll

ows

y

ou to c

h

ec

k

t

h

e tit

l

es recor

d

e

d

on t

h

e

disc easil

y

. You can choose a title to pla

y

back

f

rom this

list and easil

y

edit the titles as

y

ou pre

f

er

.

Press

[

TOP MENU

].

Title List

1 / 2

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

12:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 7/10 L1 LP

4 5 6

12 3

ORG

Chapter Mark

Protect

Edit Title Name

Scene Delete

Edit

JAN/7/10 11:00PM L1 LP

0 : 00 : 59

2

ORG

789

10

11

4 5 6

3 312

1. Tit

l

e

l

ist

:

List o

f

the titles recorded on the disc

,

and

t

h

e

ir in

fo

rm

at

i

o

n

.

•

For DVD+RW/+R, empty tit

l

e a

l

ways appears at t

h

e

last o

f

the title list

.

•

For t

h

e tit

l

es

b

eing

bl

oc

k

e

d

b

y t

h

e V-c

h

ip system,

“

BLOCK” wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

aye

d

an

d

you cannot watc

h

t

h

e

con

t

en

t

s

.

2. The

p

rotect icon

:

A

pp

ears when the title has been

protected. (Original titles onl

y)

3.

Arr

o

w

:

Indicatin

g

there is a previous / next pa

g

e

.

4

.

T

it

l

e

l

ist icon

:

Indicates a type o

f

the displayed title

l

ist

.

ORG: VR (Ori

g

inal) +VR

:

+VR m

ode

PL : VR (Pla

y

list)

Video

:

Vi

deo

m

ode

5

.

T

it

l

e nam

e

6.

T

i

t

l

e

inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n

:

Displa

y

s various information on

t

h

e

se

l

ected

t

i

t

l

e.

7

.

Sub

m

e

n

u:

Sub

m

e

n

us

f

o

r

t

h

e

se

l

ected

m

e

n

u

a

r

e

displa

y

ed here

.

8.

Ti

tle

n

a

m

e

(e

d

ita

bl

e)

:

I

f

you do not name the title,

t

h

e recor

d

e

d

ate, time an

d

t

h

e recor

d

ing mo

d

e are

d

isp

l

aye

d

h

ere

.

9. Pro

g

ress bar

:

I

ndicating the progress of the pla

y

back.

T

he vertical lines in the bar indicates cha

p

ter marks,

a

n

d

“

L

” slidin

g

on the bar indicates current point of

pla

y

back displa

y

ed in the preview window.

1

0.

Pr

e

vi

e

w win

do

w

:

Pr

e

vi

e

w

o

f

t

h

e

se

l

ected

t

i

t

l

e

i

s

displa

y

ed here

.

11. P

l

a

yb

ac

k

status

:

In

d

icating t

h

e current p

l

a

yb

ac

k

status

of

t

h

e

se

l

ected

t

i

t

l

e.

Press [RETURN] to exit t

h

e tit

l

e

l

ist

.

E

d

i

t

h

e

r

eco

r

ded

d

i

sc

You will find editing discs is easy. This unit offers

c

onvenient edit functions which are possible onl

y

with

D

VD-RW

/

-R and DVD+RW

/

+R

.

You can edit the

f

ollowing

f

rom a title list

.

•

Assigning a name to a tit

le

•

Dividin

g

a titl

e

•

Com

b

inin

g

tit

l

es

•

A

dd

ing tit

l

es to a p

l

ay

l

ist

•

Erasing all pla

y

list

•

Settin

g

or re

l

easin

g

t

h

e tit

l

e protectio

n

•

A

dd

ing or

d

e

l

eting c

h

apter mar

ks

•

Deletin

g

titles or parts of titles

(

Possible editin

g

functions depend on the recordin

g

format and editin

g

method.

)

Origina

l

an

d

p

l

ay

l

ist (VR mo

d

e

)

F

or VR mode DVD-RW,

y

ou can edit the recordings in

pla

y

list without changing the original recordings. Pla

y

list

does not take up much disc space. After

y

ou make a

recording to VR mode DVD-RW, a pla

y

list will be created

automaticall

y.

W

hat “Original” or “Pla

y

list” is for

?

T

hroughout this manual, you will

f

ind original and playlist

w

hich re

f

er to the actual content and the edited version

.

•

O

ri

g

ina

l

content refers to what’s actuall

y

recorded on

t

h

e

VR m

ode

DVD-RW

.

•

Pl

a

yl

is

t

co

n

te

n

t

r

e

f

e

r

s

to

t

h

e

ed

i

ted

v

e

r

s

i

o

n

o

f

t

h

e

VR

mode

D

V

D

-R

W

;

h

ow t

h

e origina

l

content is to

b

e p

l

a

y

e

d

bac

k

.

Fina

l

izing a

d

isc

•

Thi

s

will

a

ll

o

w

a

d

i

sc

t

h

at

i

s

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

t

hi

s

u

ni

t

to

be

p

la

y

ed back on other DVD pla

y

er — without finalization

i

t will not be pla

y

able on other DVD pla

y

er

.

•

After finalizing a DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R,

y

ou cannot edit

a

n

y

information that is on that disc

.

•

I

f

you have recorded in DVD+RW, then editing is still

p

ermitted a

f

ter

f

inalizing

.

Using these editing

f

unctions to modi

f

y copyrighted

content

f

or any purpose other than your private viewing

may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws o

f

the

Unite

d

States an

d

ot

h

er countries, an

d

may su

b

ject you

to civi

l

an

d

crimina

l

ia

b

i

l

ity

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 66E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 66 2009/12/14 18:33:312009/12/14 18:33:31

6

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

DELETING TITLES

N

ote

• I

f

y

ou delete the title in DVD+RW, deleted title will be displa

y

ed as “Empt

y

”.

• You cannot overwrite on t

h

e “Empty”

• For DVD+RW, if “Empt

y

” appears right next to the other “Empt

y

”, those “Empt

y

” combines into one.

1

D

elete

the

t

i

tle

No.5

Title List

1 / 1

JAN/7/10 7:00AM L1 SLP

7:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/7/10 SLP

456

EmptyEmpty

1 2 3

+VR Title List

1 / 1

EMPTY TITLE

4

Empty

1 2 3

+VR

Notes for deleting titles

TITLE 1TITLE 1

TITLE 1

TITLE 2

TITLE 1

TITLE 2

TITLE 1

TITLE 2

TITLE 3

Delete!Delete!

You can record

a new title.

You cannot

record

a new title.

You cannot

record

a new title.

You can record

a new title.

Delete!

The Full-Recorded discThe Full-Recorded disc

Delete!

The Full-Recorded disc

After the disc is fully recorded:

DVD-RW/DVD+RW DVD-R/DVD+R

• When a title is deleted from

DVD-RW in VR mode, the

recordable disc space will

be increased.

• When the last title is deleted from

DVD-RW in video mode or DVD+RW, the

recordable space will be increased.

• When a title is deleted from

DVD-R and DVD+R, the

recordable space will NOT be

increased.

Deleted titles

cannot create

the space.

[

RETURN

]

several times to exit the editin

g

mode. “Writin

g

to Disc” appears

momentaril

y

. It also appears when pressing

[

A

OPEN/CLOSE

]

o

r

[

I/

yy

ON/STANDBY

]

before exitin

g

the editin

g

mode after editin

g.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 67E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 67 2009/12/14 18:33:322009/12/14 18:33:32

68

EN

DELETING TITLES

You can delete titles which

y

ou do not need an

y

more

.

P

l

ease

b

e a

d

vise

d

t

h

at t

h

e tit

l

es once

d

e

l

ete

d

cannot

b

e

b

rou

gh

t

b

ac

k

to t

h

e

d

isc

.

Be sure to read “Notes

f

or deletin

g

titles” on pa

g

e 67

before

y

ou delete the title

.

1

In sto

p

mo

d

e,

p

ress [TOP MENU].

Tit

l

e

l

ist, origina

l

or p

l

ay

l

ist wi

ll

appear

.

• For VR mo

d

e DVD-RW, press

[

MENU/LIST

]

to

s

witc

h

b

etween “Origina

l

” an

d

“P

l

a

yl

ist”

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to select a desired

tit

l

e, t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mo

d

e DVD-RW origina

l

Title List

1 / 2

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 7/10

L1 LP

4 5 6

12 3

ORG

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Tit

l

e De

l

ete”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Add To Playlist

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Delete this title?

Yes

No

After that, “Are

y

ou sure?” will appear, select

“Yes” and then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

Ti

t

l

e

will

be

de

l

eted.

5

Press

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

] to ex

i

t

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

Writing to Disc 90%

Th

is operation may ta

k

e

aw

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

MENU/LIS

T

RETURN

STOP

TOP MENU

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 68E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 68 2009/12/14 18:33:332009/12/14 18:33:33

6

9

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

A

dd

ing Tit

l

es to a P

l

a

yl

is

t

Playlist

w

i

sh.

You can add up to 99 titles to a playlist (as long as

t

he total number of the pla

y

list does not exceed 999

c

h

apters)

.

1

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e step 1 in “DELETING

TITLES” on page 68 to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e

origina

l.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

tit

l

e, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Add To

Pla

y

list”, then press [ENTER]

.

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Add To Playlist

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Create a Playlist ?

Yes

No

The title is added to playlist

.

5

Press

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

] to ex

i

t

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

Th

is operation ma

y

ta

k

e

a

w

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

Note

• W

h

en a p

l

a

yl

ist contains 99 tit

l

es or more, or 999

chapters or more, “Add to Pla

y

list” cannot be

selected.

CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

RETURN

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 69E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 69 2009/12/14 18:33:352009/12/14 18:33:35

70

EN

CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST

Erasing A

ll

P

l

ay

l

ist

Playlist

1

Press

[

SETUP

].

M

ain menu wi

ll

a

pp

ear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “DVD Menu”

,

th

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Delete All

P

la

y

lists”, then press [ENTER]

.

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All Playlists

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Delete entire playlist?

Yes

No

“

Are

y

ou sure?” wi

ll

appear

.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes” and then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

DVD Menu

Format

Finalize

Disc Protect OFF ON

Delete All PlaylistDelete entire play list?

Yes

No

Are you sure?

Yes

No

Pl

ay

l

ist is

d

e

l

ete

d.

D

ata will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

Th

is operation ma

y

ta

k

e

awhile to be com

p

leted

.

N

ote

• De

l

eting a p

l

ay

l

ist wi

ll

not increase t

h

e avai

l

a

bl

e

recor

d

ing time on t

h

e

d

isc

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 70E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 70 2009/12/14 18:33:372009/12/14 18:33:37

71

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

P

utting Names on Tit

l

es

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “E

d

it Tit

l

e

Name”, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Protect

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

5

To enter a title name,

f

ollow the

steps o

f

“Guide to Edit Title Name”

on page 7

2.

Edit - Edit Title Name

abc

ABC

123

@!?

1

ORG

M

1 : 25 : 47

c

h

a

r

acte

r

set

area

f

or entering title name

s

When

y

ou finish entering a title name, press

[

ENTER

]

.

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Edit - Edit Title Name

No

Yes

MY FAVORITE

1

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

The name

y

ou entered will be activated for the title

.

7

Press [RETURN] an

d

t

h

en [RETURN] or

[

STOP

C

]

to ex

i

t.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e

a

w

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

You can put a name on the title and change it

f

rom this

menu.

1

In sto

p

mode,

p

ress [TOP MENU]

.

T

it

l

e

l

ist, origina

l

or p

l

a

yl

ist wi

ll

appear

.

• For VR mo

d

e DVD-RW, press

[

MENU/LIST

]

t

o

switc

h

b

etween “Origina

l

” an

d

“P

l

ay

l

ist”

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to select a desired

title, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.

g

.) VR mo

d

e DVD-RW ori

g

ina

l

Title List

1 / 2

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 7/10

L1 LP

4 5 6

12 3

ORG

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “E

d

it”, t

h

en press

[ENTER]

.

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

Add To Playlist

EDITING DISCS

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAYPAU SE STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

MENU/LIS

T

RETURN

STOP

TOP MENU

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 71E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 71 2009/12/14 18:33:382009/12/14 18:33:38

72

EN

1

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired character set

,

then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

2) Follow the list below

,

use [the Number buttons]

repeatedl

y

until the desired letter appears

.

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

abc

def

ghi

jkl

mno

pqrs

tuv

wxyz

! ” # $ % & ’ ( )

* + , - . / : ; < = >

? @ [ ] ^ _ { | }

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

1

ABC abc @ ! ?

123

(*1) (*1)

Select

Press

*

1 Press

, character set will be changed to the “ @!? ”

mo

d

e automatica

ll

y. Press

t

o to go

b

ac

k

to

t

h

e previous c

h

aracter set

.

•

To delete letters,

p

ress

[

CLEAR

]

repeatedl

y

.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

[

CLEAR

]

to

de

l

ete

a

ll l

ette

r

s.

•

Use

[

s

/

B

]

to move the cursor to the le

f

t and right

.

•

You can enter up to 30

l

etters

.

N

ote

• Unde

f

ined letters in a title name are shown by “*”. I

f

you

d

e

l

ete t

h

em, a

d

joining

l

etters may c

h

ange to “*”

or ot

h

er

.

G

u

i

de

to

E

d

i

t

Ti

t

l

e

N

a

m

e

EDITING DISCS

Puttin

g

Names on Tit

l

es (cont’

d)

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

CLEAR

ENTER

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

WXYZ

JKL MNO

.@/: ABC DEF

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 72E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 72 2009/12/14 18:33:402009/12/14 18:33:40

73

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

EDITING DISCS

S

etting C

h

apter Mar

k

s

1

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Putting Names

on Tit

l

es” on page 71 to

d

isp

l

ay “E

d

it”

m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “C

h

a

p

ter Mar

k

”,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Su

b

menu wi

ll

appear

.

3

Use

[

SKIP

H

/

G

]

,

[

REV

E

]

,

[FWD

D

]

,

[PLAY

B

]

and

[

PAUSE

F

]

to find the

p

oint where

y

ou will create a new chapter mark.

Or

,

use [SKIP

H

/

G

]

to find a

chapter mark that

y

ou wish to delete

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “A

dd

” or

“D

e

l

ete”

, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mo

d

e DVD-RW origina

l

Edit - Chapter Mark

Add

Delete

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

Chapter 2 / 3

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

5

Use [

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

I

f

you select “Add” at step 4, a new chapter mark

will be added, and i

f

you select “Delete” at step

4, t

h

e c

h

apter mar

k

wi

ll

b

e

d

e

l

ete

d.

e.

g

.) Ad

d

Edit - Chapter Mark - Add

Yes

No

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

Chapter 2 / 3

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

A new c

h

apter mar

k

wi

ll

b

e a

dd

e

d.

6

Press

[

RETURN

].

7

Press [RETURN] a

g

ain and then

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

]

to exit

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

This operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

You can put chapter marks in each title. Once a chapter is

marked,

y

ou can use it for the chapter search feature

.

N

ote

•

Maximum numbers o

f

chapter

f

or each DVD:

VR mo

d

e DVD : 999 c

h

apters per entire origina

l

an

d

p

l

a

yl

is

t

+VR mo

d

e DVD : 254 c

h

apters per

d

isc, 99 c

h

apters

per tit

le

•

Besides the above-mentioned, it is not likel

y

to be

able to add accordin

g

to recorded time and number

o

f cha

p

ters.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

FWD

PAU SE PLAY

RETURN

REV SKIPSKIP

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 73E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 73 2009/12/14 18:33:422009/12/14 18:33:42

74

EN

EDITING DISCS

Hi

d

in

g

C

h

apter

s

N

ote

• ”Hi

dd

en” wi

ll

b

e

d

isp

l

a

y

e

d

in t

h

e preview win

d

ow

w

h

i

l

e previewin

g

t

h

e

h

i

dd

en c

h

apter

.

• W

h

en you ma

k

e a

ll

c

h

apters in t

h

e tit

l

e “Hi

dd

en”,

“Hidden” is displayed in a thumbnail o

f

the title list

.

Title List

1 / 1

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

--:-- (2:00:00) ---/--/-- LP

4

Empty

1

Hidden

2 3

+VR

You can hide cha

p

ters

f

rom the title list

.

Hidden chapters are skipped during pla

y

back

.

In sto

p

mo

d

e,

p

ress [TOP MENU].

T

it

l

e

l

ist wi

ll

appear

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e, t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Title List

1 / 2

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1:00AM (2:00:00) JAN/ 7/10 L1 LP

4 5 6

12 3

+VR

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “E

d

it”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Hi

d

e C

h

apter”,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Submenu will a

pp

ear

.

5

Use

[

SKIP

H

]

or

[

SKIP

G

]

to

d

eci

d

e

t

h

e c

h

apter to

b

e

h

i

dd

en

.

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Hi

dd

en”

,

t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

Edit - Hide Chapter

Visible

Hidden

JAN/7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

Chapter 2 / 3 Hidden

+VR

1 : 25 : 47

7

After this o

p

eration is com

p

leted,

p

ress [RETURN] thrice to exit

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentarily

.

This operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

If

y

ou want hidden chapters to be “Visible”,

se

l

ect t

h

e c

h

a

p

ter to

b

e s

h

own. T

h

en use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Visible”, then

p

ress [ENTER]

at the ste

p

6 above

.

Data wi

ll

b

e written onto t

h

e

d

isc momentari

l

y

.

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

RETURN

SKIPSKIP

TOP MENU

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 74E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 74 2009/12/14 18:33:442009/12/14 18:33:44

75

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

D

eleting a Part o

f

a Title

1

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e ste

p

s 1 to 3 in

“

Putt

i

ng

N

a

m

es

o

n Ti

t

l

es”

on pa

g

e

71

to

d

isp

l

ay “E

d

it” menu

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Scene Delete”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW pla

y

list

.

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Title Dividing

Title Combining

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 25 : 47

You can delete a speci

f

ic part o

f

a title

.

Even when parts of title are deleted from the pla

y

list, the

origina

l

tit

l

e wi

ll

remain as it is

.

EDITING DISCS

Instructions continue on the next pa

g

e

.

N

ot

e

•

When a scene is deleted from an original, the pla

y

list

r

elated to the ori

g

inal will be deleted

.

•

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

se

l

ect

“

Sce

n

e

D

e

l

ete

” if

t

h

e

n

u

m

be

r

o

f

c

hapter marks in the original or playlist is more than

999. (De

p

en

d

s on t

h

e content, t

h

ere is a case t

h

at

you cannot select “Scene Delete” be

f

ore the number

o

f cha

p

ter marks reaches 999.

)

•

The recordable disc space will not increase even a

f

ter

deleting a part o

f

a title on the playlist

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

FWD

PAU SE PLAY

REV SKIPSKIP

RETURN

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 75E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 75 2009/12/14 18:33:452009/12/14 18:33:45

76

EN

Before

editing

Edited

start point end point

3

Use

[

SKIP

H

/

G

],

[

REV

E

],

[

FWD

D

],

[

PLAY

B

] an

d

[

PAUSE

F

] to

f

ind the start point,

th

en press [ENTER]

.

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 25 : 47

T

h

en use

[

SKIP

H

/

G

],

[

REV

E

],

[

FWD

D

],

[

PLAY

B

] an

d

[

PAUSE

F

] again to move to t

h

e en

d

p

oint, an

d

press [ENTER]

.

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 45 : 00

T

h

e

cu

r

so

r will m

o

v

e

to

“Pr

e

vi

e

w”

.

T

h

e

ba

r

at

t

h

e

botto

m

o

f

t

h

e

sc

r

ee

n in

d

i

cates

t

h

e

total and the elapsed time o

f

the title, and the

a

r

ea

se

l

ected

fo

r

de

l

et

i

o

n i

s

in

d

i

cated

in r

ed.

You can c

h

ec

k

t

h

e preview

b

y pressing

[

ENTER

]

.

• Before and after 5 seconds of the deleted

p

oint

w

ill be pla

y

back for preview

.

EDITING DISCS

Deletin

g

a Part of a Title (cont’d

)

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “De

l

ete” t

h

en

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Edit - Scene Delete

Start

End

Preview

Delete

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 47 : 00

5

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

s

e

l

ect “Yes” t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

“Are

y

ou sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using

[

K

/

L

]

and then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

Edit - Scene Delete

Are you sure?

Yes

No

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 50 : 00

The part o

f

the title is deleted

.

6

Press

[

RETURN

]

an

d

t

h

en

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

]

to ex

i

t.

Data wi

ll

b

e written onto t

h

e

d

isc momentari

l

y

.

T

h

is operation ma

y

ta

k

e

a

w

h

i

l

e to

b

e com

pl

ete

d.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 76E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 76 2009/12/14 18:33:462009/12/14 18:33:46

77

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

EDITING DISCS

D

ivi

d

in

g

a Tit

le

Playlist

You can

d

ivi

d

e one tit

l

e into two new tit

l

es

.

Note

•

You cannot divide a title o

f

the disc when the

n

umber o

f

recording titles reaches the maximum o

f

99 (-RW) or 49 (+RW), and the number o

f

recording

c

hapters reaches the maximum o

f

999 (-RW) or 254

(

+RW

).

1

In stop mo

d

e, press [TOP MENU]

.

• For VR mode DVD-RW,

p

ress

[

MENU/LIST

]

to

select “Pla

y

list”

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

/

s

/

B

]

to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

tit

l

e, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “E

d

it”

,

t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW pla

y

lis

t

Play From Start

Edit

Title Delete

4

Use

[

SKIP

H

]

,

[

SKIP

G

]

,

[

REV

E

]

,

[

FWD

D

],

[

PAUSE

F

]

an

d

[

PLAY

B

]

to

d

eci

d

e t

h

e point at w

h

ic

h

y

ou wi

ll

d

ivi

de

t

h

e

t

i

t

l

e.

5

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Title Dividin

g

”,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

6

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW pla

y

lis

t

Edit - Title Dividing

Yes

No

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 25 : 47

T

h

e tit

l

e wi

ll

b

e

d

ivi

d

e

d

into two new tit

l

es

.

B

oth

t

i

tle

n

a

m

es

a

r

e

i

de

n

t

i

cal.

F

o

r DVD+RW

:

D

ata

wi

ll

be

wri

tte

n

o

n

to

the

d

i

sc

momentari

ly.

Writing to Disc 90%

T

his operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

For VR mo

d

e DVD-RW: Procee

d

to step 7.

7

Press

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

]

to ex

i

t

.

Data will be written onto the disc momentaril

y.

This operation ma

y

take

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

FWD

MENU/LIS

T

PAU SE PLAY

RETURN

REV SKIPSKIP

STOP

TOP MENU

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 77E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 77 2009/12/14 18:33:482009/12/14 18:33:48

78

EN

EDITING DISCS

Com

b

ining Tit

l

e

s

1

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e ste

p

s 1 to 3 in

“

Divi

d

ing a

Ti

tle”

on page 77 to

d

isp

l

a

y

“E

d

it”

m

e

n

u.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect

“Ti

t

l

e

Combinin

g

”, then press [ENTER]

.

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Title Dividing

Title Combining

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

PL

1 : 25 : 47

Tit

l

e com

b

ining setting win

d

ow wi

ll

appear

.

Selected title gra

y

s out, and the frame of the

next title becomes

y

ellow

.

Edit - Title Combining

1 / 6

JAN/ 7/10 11:00PM L1 LP

11:00PM (0:30:00) JAN/ 7/10 L1 LP

4 5 6

23

PL

1

1 +

Use

[

K

/

L

/

{

/

B

]

to

s

e

l

ect

a

n

ot

h

e

r

title to combine, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Se

l

ection menu wi

ll

a

pp

ear

.

4

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Combine selected titles?

Yes

No

The two titles will combine into a sin

g

le title

.

Title List

1 / 6

PL

1

4 5 6

2 3

JAN/ 7/10 12:00AM L1 LP

12:00AM (2:30:00) JAN/ 7/10 L1 LP

5

Press

[

RETURN

]

or

[

STOP

C

]

to exit

.

Data wi

ll

b

e written onto t

h

e

d

isc momentari

l

y

.

T

h

is operation ma

y

ta

k

e

a

while to be com

p

leted

.

Playlist

Note

• You cannot se

l

ect t

h

e same tit

l

e twice an

d

com

b

ine

it into a sing

l

e tit

l

e

.

• If either one of the two ori

g

inal titles is deleted, the

co

m

b

in

ed

n

e

w

t

i

t

l

e

i

s

a

l

so

de

l

eted.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

RETURN

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 78E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 78 2009/12/14 18:33:492009/12/14 18:33:49

79

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

EDITING DISCS

S

etting or Releasing the Title Protectio

n

1

Follow the steps 1 to 3 in

“

P

utting

Names on Tit

l

e

s

”

on pa

g

e

71

to

displa

y

“Edit” menu

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “Protect”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

Edit

Scene Delete

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

Protect

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

• If the title is

p

rotected,

i

con wi

ll

a

pp

ear in

the ori

g

inal list

.

3

Co

nfirm

t

h

e

in

d

i

cat

i

o

n

“

O

FF ON”. Press [ENTER] a

g

ain.

• If the title is alread

y

protected, “ON

O

FF” wi

ll

appear. I

f

y

ou press

[

ENTER

]

,

the title will be

released from

p

rotection

.

Edit - Protect

OFF ON

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

ORG

1 : 25 : 47

•icon will appear on the title in the ori

g

inal

li

st.

4

Press [RETURN] an

d

t

h

en [RETURN] or

[

STOP

C

]

to ex

i

t.

Data wi

ll

b

e written onto t

h

e

d

isc momentari

l

y

.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e

a

w

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

To protect a w

h

o

l

e

d

isc

(VR mo

d

e DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R

on

l

y)

:

Se

l

ect

“Di

sc

Pr

otect

O

FF

O

N” fr

o

m

t

h

e

DVD

Menu

,

then select “Yes”

.

R

e

f

e

r

to

“

S

ETTING A DI

SC

T

O

PR

O

TE

C

T”

o

n

pa

g

e 29

.

T

o prevent the accidental editin

g

, or erasin

g

o

f

the titles,

y

ou can protect them in “Edit” menu

.

You can cancel the title protection

f

eature a

f

ter it is

appl

ie

d.

Original

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

RETURN

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 79E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 79 2009/12/14 18:33:512009/12/14 18:33:51

80

EN

EDITING DISCS

Setting or C

l

earing A

ll

C

h

apter Mar

k

s at Once

1

Fo

ll

ow t

h

e ste

p

s 1 to 3 in

“

P

utting

N

a

m

es

o

n Ti

tles

”

on pa

g

e 71 to

d

isp

l

ay “E

d

it” menu

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect “C

h

a

p

ter Mar

k

”,

t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Edit

Edit Title Name

Chapter Mark

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

Video

1 : 25 : 47

3

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect

t

h

e

des

ir

ed

interva

l

, t

h

en

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Edit - Chapter Mark

OFF

5 minutes

10 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

60 minutes

JAN/ 7/10 1:00AM L1 LP

1

Video

1 : 25 : 47

4

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select “Yes”, then press

[

ENTER

].

C

h

apter mar

k

s are a

dd

e

d.

If

y

ou select “OFF” at step 3, all the chapter

m

a

rk

s

a

r

e

r

ased.

5

Press [RETURN] an

d

t

h

en [RETURN] or

[

STOP

C

]

to ex

i

t.

Data wi

ll

b

e written onto t

h

e

d

isc momentari

l

y

.

T

h

is operation may ta

k

e

a

w

h

i

l

e to

b

e comp

l

ete

d.

For titles in video mode DVD-RW,

y

ou can set or edit

c

h

apter at every time interva

l

. You can c

l

ear t

h

e c

h

apter

mar

k

too

.

You can speci

f

y the interval o

f

chapter marks

f

or titles last

more t

h

an 5 minutes

.

N

ote

• You cannot se

l

ect a c

h

apter mar

k

interva

l

t

h

at

exceeds the length o

f

a title

.

• The length o

f

chapters may slightly deviate

f

rom the

one speci

f

ied at the step 3.

• A chapter mark ma

y

be dela

y

ed depending on the

recordin

g

content

.

• Maximum number o

f

cha

p

ter

f

or video mode DVD is

99 c

h

apters per tit

l

e

.

• The interval

f

or auto chapter may be up to two

minutes di

ff

erent

f

rom the time option you set

.

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

RETURN

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 80E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 80 2009/12/14 18:33:532009/12/14 18:33:53

8

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

T

he

f

ollowing table is the contents which you can set and the de

f

ault settings

.

Re

f

er to the

f

ollowin

g

table

f

or use

f

ul operation

.

Setup Items (highlight is the default) Contents

General Setting

P

la

y

bac

k

P

a

r

e

n

ta

l L

ock



p

a

g

e 84

O

FF

level 8

[

Adult

]

to

1

[

Kid Sa

f

e

]

Set the parental level for DVD pla

y

back.

Aud

i

o

Out



p

a

g

e 85

Dy

namic Range Contro

l

O

N

O

F

Compressin

g

the ran

g

e of sound volume

.

PC

M

48k

Hz

9

6k

H

z

Set w

h

et

h

er t

h

e soun

d

recor

d

e

d

in 96

k

Hz wi

ll

b

e

d

own samp

l

e

d

to 48

k

Hz

.

D

o

lby

Digita

l

P

CM

S

tream

Set the t

y

pe of sound signal which outputs from

t

h

e

d

igita

l

au

d

io output

j

ac

k.

D

T

S

O

N

O

F

Set w

h

et

h

er DTS si

g

na

l

is output or not

.

D

isc Menu Lan

g

ua

g

e



p

a

g

e 86

E

ng

l

is

h

Frenc

h

Spanis

h

Ot

h

e

r

Set the lan

g

ua

g

e for disc menu lan

g

ua

g

e

.

A

u

d

io Language



p

age

8

6

O

rigina

l

En

g

lis

h

Fr

e

n

ch

S

p

anis

h

Ot

h

er

Set the language

f

or audio

.

S

ubtitle Lan

g

ua

ge



p

a

g

e

8

6

O

FF

Eng

l

is

h

Frenc

h

Spanis

h

Ot

h

e

r

Set the lan

g

ua

g

e for subtitles

.

A

ng

l

e Icon



p

age

8

6

O

N

O

F

Set w

h

et

h

er to

d

isp

l

ay t

h

e ang

l

e icon or not

.

St

i

ll

M

ode



p

age

8

6

Auto

Fi

e

l

d

Fr

a

m

e

Set the t

y

pe o

f

still image in pausing pla

y

back

.

D

ispla

y

OSD Lan

g

ua

g

e



p

a

g

e 87

E

n

g

lish

Fran

ç

a

is

Es

p

año

l

Set the language for OSD (on-screen displa

y

).

Sc

r

ee

n

Sa

v

e

r



p

a

g

e 87

O

F

1 m

i

n

ute

5

m

i

n

utes

1

0 m

i

nute

s

15 m

i

nute

s

Set the idlin

g

time before the screen saver starts

.

F

L

D

immer



p

age

8

7

A

ut

o

B

rig

h

t

D

a

r

k

Set the brightness o

f

the

f

ront panel display

.

V-C

h

i

p

MP

AA

R

atin

g



page 8

8

X

N

C

-1

7

R

P

G

-1

3

P

G

N

R

Set t

h

e viewing

l

imitation accor

d

ing to US movie

rat

i

ngs

.

T

V

R

atin

g



page

88

TV

-

MA

TV-1

4

TV-P

G

TV-

G

TV-Y

7

TV-

Y

Non

e

Set t

h

e viewing

l

imitation accor

d

ing to US T

V

program rat

i

ngs

.

C

ana

d

ian En

gl

is

h

Ratin

g



pa

g

e

88

1

8+

14+

P

G

C8+

C

E

Set t

h

e viewin

g

l

imitation accor

d

in

g

to Cana

d

ian

En

g

lish lan

g

ua

g

e ratin

g

s

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 81E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 81 2009/12/14 18:33:542009/12/14 18:33:54

8

2

EN

Setup Items (highlight is the default) Contents

General Setting

Displa

y

V-Chi

p

C

anadian French Ratin

g



page

88

1

8a

n

s+

1

6a

n

s+

1

3a

n

s+

8a

n

s+

G

E

Set the viewing limitation according to Canadian

French language ratings

.

C

han

g

e Password



pa

g

e 8

8

Chan

g

e the password.

Vi

deo

Pro

g

ressive



p

a

g

e 89

ON

O

FF

Set to the pro

g

ressive scan mode (set to "ON") or

to the interlace scan mode

(

set to "OFF"

)

.

TV

A

spect



p

age

89

4:3 Letter

B

o

x

4:3 Pan

&

S

ca

n

1

6:

9 Wi

de

Set a picture size according to aspect ratio o

f

your

TV.

S

e

l

ect Vi

d

eo - L1(Rear)



p

age

2

6

V

i

deo

I

n

S

-Vi

deo

I

n

Set the video input type

f

or the external input

.

Recordin

g

Auto Cha

p

ter



p

age

3

4

O

F

5

min

utes

10

min

utes

1

5

min

utes

30

min

utes

60

min

utes

Insert cha

p

ter marks at even time interval.

R

ecordin

g

Audio Select (XP

)



p

a

g

e 35

P

CM

D

olb

y

Digital

Set the recording audio t

y

pe. (Onl

y

when the rec

mode is set to XP.

)

A

uto

F

in

a

liz

e



p

a

g

e 30

D

i

sc

F

u

l

ON

O

FF

Set the unit to finalize the disc automaticall

y

.

E

nd o

f

Timer Rec

ON

O

FF

Aspect Ratio (Vi

d

eo mo

d

e

)



p

age

3

5

A

uto

4:

3

16:

9

Set a aspect ratio

f

or video mode recording.

Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e



p

age

3

4

ON

O

FF

Set to pro

h

i

b

it a

dd

itiona

l

recor

d

ing (OFF) or to

replace the title list a

f

ter recording (ON).

C

l

oc

kClock Settin

g



pa

g

e 2

5

Set

t

h

e

c

l

oc

k

.

H

D

MI

Fo

rm

at



p

a

g

e 90

RG

B

YC

b

C

r

Set the color s

p

ace for the HDMI out

p

ut

.

H

DMI Au

d

io



p

age

9

1

O

N

O

F

Set w

h

et

h

er to output t

h

e HDMI au

d

io signa

l

or

no

t.

RG

B Range



p

age

9

1

No

rm

a

l

En

h

ance

d

Set the black-white contrast level

f

or HDMI RGB

ou

t

pu

t.

H

DMI

C

E

C



p

age

9

1

ON

O

FF

Set whether to utilize the HDMI-CEC

f

unction. The

HDMI-CEC

f

unction allows all components

connecte

d

via HDMI ca

bl

e to act in conjunction

wit

h

t

h

is unit.

Reset A

ll



page

92

Y

e

s

No

Set to the de

f

ault setting

.

Note

• Your change to each setting stays on even when the power is o

ff.

• An item w

h

ic

h

is not current

l

y avai

l

a

bl

e is graye

d

in t

h

e settings

.

LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 82E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 82 2009/12/14 18:33:552009/12/14 18:33:55

83

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

GENERAL SETTING

P

r

ess

[

STOP

C

]

i

f

y

ou are pla

y

ing back a disc

.

1

Press

[

SETUP

]

an

d

use

[

K

/

L

]

to

select “General Settin

g

“, then press

[

ENTER

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “P

l

ay

b

ac

k

”, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

HDMI

Reset All

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

item

,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Parental Lock

Audio Out

Disc Menu Language

Audio Language

Subtitle Language

Angle Icon

Still Mode

Submenu will a

pp

ear

.

4

Re

f

er

1

t

o

7

on pages 84 to 86 an

d

set t

h

e se

l

ecte

d

item

.

5

When

y

ou finish with the setting,

p

ress [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

Pl

a

yb

ac

k

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 83E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 83 2009/12/14 18:33:552009/12/14 18:33:55

84

EN

GENERAL SETTING

1

Parental Lock (Default: OFF)

Some DVD-video feature a parental lock level. Playbac

k

will stop if the ratings exceed the levels

y

ou set, it will

require

y

ou to enter a password before the disc will

pla

y

back. This feature prevents

y

our children from

viewin

g

inappropriate material

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect t

h

e

d

esire

d

l

eve

l

, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

Parental Lock

OFF

8 [Adult]

7 [NC 17]

6 [R]

5 [PG R]

4 [PG 13]

3 [PG]

2 [G]

1 [Kid Safe]

If a password has not been set

y

et, proceed to

A

.

I

f

a password has been set already, proceed to

B

.

RATING EXPLANATI

O

N

S

•

OFF : Parenta

l

Contro

l

is inactive; a

ll

d

iscs can p

l

ay

.

•

8 [Adult]: DVD software of an

y

grades (adult/general

/

c

hildren) can be pla

y

ed back

.

•

7 [NC 17]: No one un

d

er 17 a

d

mitte

d.

•

6 [R]: Restricte

d

; un

d

er 17 requires accompanying

parent or a

d

u

l

t guar

d

ian

.

•

5

[

PG R

]

: Parental Guidance Recommended.

•

4 [PG13]: Unsuitable

f

or children under 13

.

•

3 [PG]: Parenta

l

Gui

d

ance suggeste

d.

•

2

[

G

]

: General Audience

.

•

1

[

Kid Safe

]

: Suitable for children

.

Note

• Parental lock function ma

y

not be available to some

d

i

scs.

• With some DVD, it may be di

ff

icult to

f

ind i

f

they are

c

ompatible with parental lock. Be sure to check i

f

the

parental lock

f

unction operates in the way that you

h

ave set

.

• Record the password in case

y

ou forget it

.

• If there is a DVD in the unit when

y

ou set up the

p

arental lock,

p

ress

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to

act

iv

ate

t

h

e

p

arental lock level

.

A

A passwor

d

h

as not

b

een set yet.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Yes”, then

p

ress [ENTER]. Use

[t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter a new passwor

d

except

f

or 4737, then press [ENTER]

.

Change Password?

Yes

No

Password Input

Y

es

Your settin

g

will be activated

.

B

A password has been set alread

y

.

• Use [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons] to enter t

h

e current

passwor

d.

Password Input

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

• I

f

you want to change password, use [

K

/

L

] to select

“Yes” t

h

en press [ENTER]. Use [t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons]

to enter a new password except for 4737, then press

[

ENTER

].

Change Password?

Yes

No

Password Input

Y

e

s

<chan

g

e the password

>

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

N

ote

•

P

r

ess

[

CLEAR

]

to erase num

b

ers entere

d

incorrect

ly.

• When you

f

orget the password or you want to clear

a

ll

settings in “Parenta

l

Loc

k

” menu, enter 4737 using

[t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

in passwor

d

input win

d

ow.

Passwor

d

wi

ll

b

e c

l

eare

d

an

d

parenta

l

eve

l

s wi

ll

b

e

set to

“

OFF

”.

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

(cont’

d

)

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 84E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 84 2009/12/14 18:33:562009/12/14 18:33:56

85

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

GENERAL SETTING

2

Audio Out

Choose the appropriate audio setting for

y

our external device

.

I

t will only a

ff

ect a disc playback

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

Audio Out

Dynamic Range Control

PCM

Dolby Digital

DTS

A

B

C

D

A

D

ynamic Range Control (De

f

ault : ON)

Set to “ON” to compress the ran

g

e between soft and loud sounds

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Dynamic Range Control

ON

OFF

N

ote

•

Dynamic range control

f

unction is available only on

t

h

e

d

iscs w

h

ic

h

are recor

d

e

d

in t

h

e Do

lby

Digita

l

f

o

rm

at.

B

S

ettings

f

or PCM (De

f

ault : 48kHz)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

PCM

48kHz

96kHz

4

8

k

Hz

:

I

f

your ampli

f

ier/decoder is NOT compatible

w

it

h

96

k

Hz PCM, se

l

ect “48

k

Hz”. 96

k

Hz soun

d

w

ill be output in 48kHz

.

96k

Hz

:

If

y

our amplifier/decoder is compatible with

96kHz PCM

,

select “96kHz”. 96kHz sound will

b

e output

.

N

ote

W

h

en p

l

a

y

ing

b

ac

k

d

isc wit

h

cop

y

rig

h

t protectio

n

•

Even i

f

you select “96kHz”, the sound will be down

s

amp

l

e

d

at 48

k

Hz

.

C

S

ettings

f

or Dolb

y

Digital (De

f

ault : Stream

)

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a settin

g

, t

h

en press [ENTER].

Dolby Digital

PCM

Stream

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

PC

M

:

Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).

When

y

our amplifier/decoder is NO

T

compatible with Dolb

y

Digital, set to “PCM”

.

St

r

ea

m

:

Outputs Do

lby

Digita

l

signa

l

s.

When

y

our amplifier/decoder is compatible

wit

h

Do

lby

Digita

l

, set to “Stream”

.

D

S

ettin

g

s for DTS (Default : ON

)

S

e

l

ect a setting using

[

K

/

L

]

, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

DTS

ON

OFF

O

N : Outputs DTS signa

l

s.

I

f

your ampli

f

ier / decoder is compatible with

DTS®, set to

“

ON

”.

O

FF : No DTS signa

l

is output.

I

f

your ampli

f

ier / decoder is NOT compatible

wit

h

DTS®, set to “OFF”

.

Pl

a

yb

ac

k

(cont’

d

)

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 85E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 85 2009/12/14 18:33:582009/12/14 18:33:58

86

EN

GENERAL SETTING

3

Disc Menu Language (Default : English)

Set the language for disc menu

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

l

anguage, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Disc Menu Language

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

4

Audio Language (Default : Original)

Set t

h

e au

d

io

l

anguage

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

l

anguage, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Audio Language

Original

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your settin

g

will be activated

.

• When “Ori

g

inal” is selected, the audio lan

g

ua

g

e will be

in the disc’s default lan

g

ua

g

e

.

5

Subtitle Language (Default : OFF)

Set the subtitle lan

g

ua

g

e

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

l

anguage, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Subtitle Language

OFF

English

French

Spanish

Other

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

If “

Ot

h

e

r” i

s

se

l

ected

f

o

r

3

to

5

,

press 4-digit code

us

i

ng

[

the Number buttons

]

.

Code Input

----

Re

f

er to the language code table on page 98

.

Note

• Onl

y

the languages supported b

y

the disc can be

se

l

ected.

• Au

d

io

l

anguage setting may not

b

e avai

l

a

bl

e to

some

d

iscs

.

• You can also chan

g

e or switch off the subtitles on a

D

VD fr

o

m

t

h

e

d

i

sc

m

e

n

u

if i

t

i

s

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e.

• Pr

ess

[

CLEAR

]

to erase numbers entered incorrectl

y.

6

Angle Icon (Default : ON)

Set to “ON” to show the angle icon during the playback

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Angle Icon

ON

OFF

7

Still Mode (Default : Auto)

Select “Auto” usuall

y.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Still Mode

Auto

Field

Frame

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

A

uto : Optimum reso

l

ution setting (“Fie

ld

” or

“Frame”) wi

ll

b

e se

l

ecte

d.

Fie

ld

: Images in t

h

e sti

ll

mo

d

e wi

ll

b

e sta

b

i

l

ize

d.

F

rame : Images in the still mode will be highly de

f

ined

.

N

ote

•

F

rame is one completed video image made up o

f

two

f

ields (There are 30

f

rames per second o

f

NTSC video)

.

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

(cont’

d

)

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 86E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 86 2009/12/14 18:34:002009/12/14 18:34:00

8

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

1

OSD Language (Default : English)

Set the language for the on-screen displa

y.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a

l

anguage, t

h

en press [ENTER].

OSD Language

English

Français

Español

2

Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)

Set the time to activate the screen saver

f

unction on the

TV

screen

.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER].

Screen Saver

OFF

1 minute

5 minutes

10 minutes

15 minutes

Your settin

g

will be activated

.

3

FL Dimmer (Default: Bright)

Set the

f

ront panel displa

y

brightness

.

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a settin

g

, then press [ENTER].

FL Dimmer

Auto

Bright

Dark

If

“Auto” is selected, the display gets dark when the

p

ower is off

.

4

V-Chip

W

it

h

t

h

e V-c

h

ip system in t

h

is unit, you can set t

h

e

viewing limitation

f

or the analog TV programs received

f

rom the external tuner or recorded on DVDs to prevent

your children

f

rom watching inappropriate programs. I

f

th

e unit

d

etects a

bl

oc

k

e

d

program, a restriction message

appears an

d

you are not a

ll

owe

d

to view t

h

e program

.

1)

Use [the Number buttons] to enter the access

p

asswor

d.

I

f

y

ou have not set the password, first, use

[

the

N

umber buttons

]

to set the access

p

assword, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

The number

y

ou entered will be stored

a

s the access

p

assword

.

Password Input

Pr

ess

[

STOP

C

]

if

y

ou are pla

y

ing back a disc

.

1

Press [SETUP] an

d

use [

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Displa

y

”, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

OSD Language

Screen Saver

FL Dimmer

V-Chip

1

2

3

4

Su

b

menu wi

ll

appear

.

4

Press [SETUP] to exit

.

D

isp

l

a

y

GENERAL SETTING

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 87E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 87 2009/12/14 18:34:022009/12/14 18:34:02

88

EN

2

)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

item, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

V-Chip

MPAA Rating

TV Rating

Canadian English Rating

Canadian French Rating

Change Password

A

B

C

D

E

A

MPAA Ratin

g

B

T

V

R

atin

g

C

anadian En

g

lish Ratin

g

D

C

ana

d

ian Frenc

h

Ratin

g

You can set the viewin

g

limitation accordin

g

to

M

PAA ratin

g

(US movie ratin

g

s),

T

V Ratin

g

(US TV pro

g

ram ratin

g

s),

C

anadian En

g

lish Ratin

g

(Canadian En

g

lish lan

g

ua

g

e ratin

g

s

)

,

Canadian French Ratin

g

(Canadian French lan

g

ua

g

e ratin

g

s)

.

1)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select the desired ratin

g

, then press

[ENTER] repeatedl

y

to switch between view and

block. When it is blocked a ke

y

icon will appear

.

e

.g.

)

MPAA ratin

g

MPAA Rating

X

NC-17

R

PG-13

PG

G

NR

[MPAA Rat

i

ng

]

R

at

i

ng

C

ategor

y

X

Mature au

d

ience on

ly

h

ig

h

e

r

N

C

-1

7

No one un

d

er 17 a

d

mitte

d

R

Restricted; under 17 re

q

uires

accompan

y

ing parent or adult guardia

n

P

G

-13

U

nsuitable

f

or children under 1

3

P

G

Parenta

l

gui

d

ance suggeste

d

G

Ge

n

e

r

al

aud

i

e

n

ce

lo

w

er

NR

No rat

i

n

g

[TV Rat

i

ng

]

R

atin

g

Categor

y

TV

-

MA

Mature au

d

ience on

ly

h

ig

h

e

r

TV

-1

4

U

nsuitable

f

or children under 1

4

T

V-P

G

Parenta

l

gui

d

ance suggeste

d

T

V-

G

enera

l

au

d

ienc

e

T

V-Y

7

A

pp

ro

p

riate

f

or all children 7 and older

TV

-

Y

A

pp

ro

p

riate for all childre

n

l

o

w

er

N

o

n

e

No ratin

g

[Cana

d

ian Eng

l

is

h

Rating

]

Rat

i

ng

C

ategor

y

18

+

Ad

u

l

t au

d

ience on

l

y

h

i

gh

er

14+

U

nsuitable

f

or a

g

es under 1

4

P

G

P

arenta

l

g

ui

d

ance su

gg

este

d

G

Ge

n

e

r

a

l

aud

i

e

n

ce

C

8

+

F

or c

h

i

ld

ren over 8

C

F

or a

ll

c

h

i

ld

ren

l

owe

r

E

xempt program

[Canadian French Ratin

g]

Rat

i

ng

C

ategor

y

1

8

ans

+

Ad

u

l

t au

d

ience on

l

y

h

ig

h

er

1

6

ans

+

U

nsuitable

f

or ages under 1

6

1

3a

n

s+

U

nsuitable

f

or ages under 1

3

8

ans

+

U

nsuitable

f

or ages under

8

G

Ge

n

e

r

al

aud

i

e

n

ce

lo

w

er

E

xempt program

As for TV Rating’s TV-MA, TV-14, TV-PG, or TV-Y7,

y

ou

can further set the sub ratin

g

s to block specific

elements of pro

g

rammin

g

. Press [

K

/

L

/

{

/

{

B

]

to select

the desired ratin

g

or sub ratin

g

, then press [ENTER]

r

epeatedl

y

to switch between view and block. Sub

r

atin

g

status will appear on the side of the main ratin

g

.

TV Rating

TV-MA

TV-14

TV-PG

TV-G

TV-Y7

TV-Y

FV V S L D

TV Rating

TV-MA

TV-14

TV-PG

TV-G

TV-Y7

TV-Y

None

FV V S L D

S

ub Ratin

g

Categor

y

Ratin

g

FV

F

antas

y

Violence

TV

-

Y7

V

i

o

l

e

n

ce

T

V-P

G

TV

-14

TV

-

MA

S

exua

l

Situation

L

C

oarse Language

D

S

uggestive Dia

l

ogu

e

T

V-P

G

, TV-14

N

ote

• C

h

an

g

in

g

t

h

e main ratin

g

to

bl

oc

k

or view

automatica

lly

c

h

anges a

ll

its su

b

ratings to t

h

e same

(

block or view

).

E

Ch

ange Passwor

d

Chan

g

e the current password

.

Use

[

the Number Buttons

]

to enter new access

p

assword

.

N

ote

•

P

ress

[

CLEAR

]

to erase num

b

ers entere

d

incorrect

l

y.

• When you

f

orgot the access password, enter 4737

us

i

ng

[

t

h

e Num

b

er

b

uttons

]

in passwor

d

input

win

d

ow. Passwor

d

wi

ll

b

e c

l

eare

d.

GENERAL SETTING

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 88E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 88 2009/12/14 18:34:042009/12/14 18:34:04

8

9

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

GENERAL SETTING

1

Progressive (Default : OFF)

Th

is unit is compati

bl

e wit

h

t

h

e progressive scan s

y

stem.

T

he

f

eature provides you with the higher de

f

inition

i

mages t

h

an t

h

e tra

d

itiona

l

output system

d

oes. To uti

l

ize

t

his

f

eature, you must set progressive scan mode to “ON”

.

1)

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “ON“, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Progressive

ON

OFF

{

/

{

B

] to select “Yes“, then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Activating progressive scan:

Check your TV has progressive scan

and connect with component video cable.

NOTE :

If there is no picture or picture is

distorted after selecting “Yes”,

Wait about 15 seconds for auto recovery.

Activate? Yes No

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Yes“ wit

h

in 15 secon

d

s, t

h

en

press

[

ENTER

].

Your setting wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

N

ote

• I

f

your TV is compatible with progressive scan (480p), you

are recommen

d

e

d

to use t

h

e HDMI or component vi

d

eo

c

a

bl

e (commercia

ll

y avai

l

a

bl

e) to connect t

h

is unit to t

h

e

TV. (Re

f

er to pages 19-20.) I

f

not, use the RCA video cable

an

d

set t

h

e progressive scan to “OFF”

.

• If the Progressive Scan image is distorted,

y

ou can

cancel Progressive Scan b

y

pressing and holding

[

SETUP

]

for more than 3 seconds durin

g

DVD

pla

y

back. The “Progressive” setting will be “OFF”

.

• W

h

en se

l

ecting “No” or not pressing any

b

uttons on

t

h

e unit or remote contro

l

wit

h

in 15 secon

d

s at step 3,

progressive scan remains to

b

e “OFF” (inter

l

ace scan).

2

TV Aspect (Default: 16:9 Wide)

You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the

f

ormats o

f

w

hat

y

ou are pla

y

ing back with the unit and

y

our T

V

screen

(

4:3 stan

d

ar

d

or 16:9 wi

d

escreen TV

).

Use

[

K

/

L

]

to select a desired o

p

tion, then

p

ress [ENTER].

TV Aspect

4:3 Letter Box

4:3 Pan & Scan

16:9 Wide

I

f

y

ou have a standard TV

:

Se

l

ect “4:3 Letter Box”, so t

h

at

bl

ac

k

b

ars appear on t

h

e

t

op and bottom o

f

the TV screen when playing back a

w

ide-screen picture. Select “4:3 Pan & Scan”

f

or a

f

ull

h

eig

h

t picture wit

h

b

ot

h

si

d

es trimme

d

w

h

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

wi

d

e-screen picture

.

I

f

y

ou have a widescreen TV:

Select

“1

6:

9 Wi

de

”

.

Pr

ess

[STOP

C

]

if

y

ou are pla

y

ing back a disc

.

1

Press [SETUP] an

d

use [

K

/

L

]

to

se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”, t

h

en press

[

ENTER

].

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Video”, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a

d

esire

d

item,

t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

Progressive

TV Aspect

Select Video

1

2

3

Submenu will a

pp

ear

.

4

R

efe

r

1

to

2

on this pa

g

e and set

t

h

e

se

l

ected

i

te

m

.

• For

3

,

re

f

er to “SETTINGS FOR THE VIDEO

IN

P

U

T

“

on pa

g

e 26

.

5

When you

f

inish with the setting,

p

ress [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

Vi

deo

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

STOP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 89E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 89 2009/12/14 18:34:052009/12/14 18:34:05

90

EN

1

Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect “Genera

l

Setting”,

then press [ENTER]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “HDMI”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

HDMI

Reset All

• You cannot se

l

ect HDMI w

h

en an HDMI ca

bl

e is

not connecte

d

an

d

t

h

e item is s

h

own in grey

colo

r

.

3

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a desired item

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

Format

HDMI Audio

RGB Range

HDMI CEC

1

2

3

4

• Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

se

l

ect

1

throu

g

h

3

wh

e

n

a

n

HDMI cable is not connected

(

the items will be

s

hown in gre

y

)

.

4

When you

f

inish with the setting,

press [SETUP] to ex

i

t

.

1

Format (Default : RGB)

You can select the color space

f

or HDMI output.

Set the appropriate color space

f

or your display device

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a settin

g

, then press [ENTER]

.

•

W

h

en t

h

e connecte

d

evice is not compati

bl

e wit

h

t

h

e

Y/Cb/Cr, HDMI signal is output as RGB regardless o

f

the

sett

i

ng

.

Format

RGB

YCbCr

H

D

MI

GENERAL SETTING

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 90E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 90 2009/12/14 18:34:072009/12/14 18:34:07

9

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

2

HDMI Audio (Default : ON)

I

f

you do not want to output the audio through HDMI

(when

y

ou digitall

y

output the audio through the

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to

y

our audio s

y

stem,

etc.),

y

ou can set the HDMI audio output off

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to se

l

ect a setting, t

h

en press [ENTER]

.

•

Set to “OFF” when the HDMI sound is not out

p

ut

.

HDMI Audio

ON

OFF

Y

our settin

g

will be activated

.

3

RGB Range (Default : Normal)

Y

ou can ad

j

ust the RGB range to make the dark areas o

f

t

h

e HDMI ima

g

es

b

ri

gh

ter

.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a settin

g

, then press [ENTER]

.

•

Se

l

ect

“Enh

a

n

ced

“ if

t

h

e

b

l

ac

k-whi

te

co

n

t

r

ast

i

s

n

ot

c

l

ea

r

.

•

This setting is e

ff

ective only

f

or HDMI RGB output

.

RGB Range

Normal

Enhanced

Y

our settin

g

wi

ll

b

e activate

d.

4

HDMI CEC (Default : OFF)

Y

ou can control all HDMI-CEC com

p

atible com

p

onents

connected via HDMI cable b

y

simple button operations o

f

r

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

o

l

o

f

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

In order to enable the

f

unction you need to set “HDMI

C

E

C”

to

“O

N

”.

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select a settin

g

, then press [ENTER]

.

HDMI CEC

ON

OFF

GENERAL SETTING

H

DMI

(

cont’

d)

Fu

n

ct

i

o

n

s

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

f

o

r

t

h

e

HDMI-

C

E

C

• One touch play

W

hen the operations with following buttons of this

u

nit’s remote control are per

f

ormed, the TV will

a

utomatica

ll

y turne

d

on an

d

switc

h

to appropriate input

ch

anne

l.

B

uttons

f

or one touch play:

[TIMER PROG.]

,

[SETUP]

,

[INPUT SELECT

],

[

PLAY

B

],

[TOP MENU]

,

[MENU/LIST

]

• System in

f

ormation

G

et & Set Menu Language:

Th

is unit recognizes t

h

e

O

SD language set

f

or the TV and automatically set the

s

ame

l

anguage as t

h

e p

l

a

y

er menu

l

anguage (OSD

m

enu language)

f

or this unit

.

Po

w

e

r

o

ff

:

W

hen

y

ou turn the TV off, this unit and all

e

quipment connected via HDMI will automaticall

y

turns

o

ff except durin

g

recordin

g

on the unit

.

R

eceiving operational signal

f

rom TV’s remote

c

ontro

l

:You can operate t

h

is unit wit

h

TV’s remote

c

ontrol. Check your TV owner’s manual

f

or details

.

N

ote

• This

f

unction ma

y

not work properl

y

depending on the T

V

y

ou are connect

i

ng

.

• The available operation may di

ff

er depends on the TV’s

remote contro

l

you use

.

• Other com

p

onents must be com

p

atible with HDMI-CEC in

o

r

de

r

to

use

t

hi

s

f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 91E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 91 2009/12/14 18:34:082009/12/14 18:34:08

9

2

EN

Reset the settin

g

to de

f

ault

.

1

Press [SETUP] in sto

p

mo

d

e an

d

use

[

K

/

L

] to select “General Settin

g

”,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

2

Use

[

K

/

L

] to select “Reset All”

,

then

p

ress [ENTER]

.

General Setting

Playback

Display

Video

Recording

Clock

HDMI

Reset All

3

Select “Yes” usin

g

[

K

/

L

]

, then

p

ress

[

ENTER

].

Reset to factory default?

Yes

No

“Are

y

ou sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using

[

K

/

L

]

and then

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

.

Your setting wi

ll

b

e initia

l

ize

d.

R

eset

A

ll

N

ot

e

•

The settin

g

s listed below will remain unchan

g

ed

even after resetting to the factor

y

default

.

- Clock settin

g

- OSD

l

anguage settin

g

- Parental lock settin

g

- V-c

h

ip setting

- T

i

mer program

s

GENERAL SETTING

SE-R0265

OPEN/

CLOSE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI

.@/: ABC

GHI

PQRS TUV

SPACE

SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO

TOP MENU

CLEAR RETURN

MENU/LIST

WXYZ

JKL MNO

DEF

ENTER

SKIP REV

PLAY

REC MODE ZOOMRECREPEAT

PAU SE

TIME SLIP

1.3x / 0.8x PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

STOP

FWD SKIP

TIMER

PROG.

SATELLITE

LINK

ENTER

SETUP

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 92E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 92 2009/12/14 18:34:102009/12/14 18:34:10

93

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

TROUBLESHOOTING

Be

f

ore requesting service

f

or this unit, check the table below

f

or a possible cause o

f

the problem you are experiencing.

Some simp

l

e c

h

ec

k

s or a minor a

d

justment on

y

our part ma

y

e

l

iminate t

h

e pro

bl

em an

d

restore proper operation

.

Symptom Remedy

Po

w

er

T

he power does not turn on

.

• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely

.

• Check the breaker (in case of

p

ower failure)

.

P

i

ctur

e

T

here is no

p

icture

.

• Re-connect the connecting cords securel

y.

• Check if the connectin

g

cords are dama

g

ed

.

• If the main menu a

pp

ears on the TV screen,

p

ress

[

RETURN

]

to

e

xi

t.

• Check the connection to

y

our TV (pages 18-21)

.

• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctl

y

according to

y

our T

V

(pa

g

e 90)

.

• Switch the input selector on

y

our TV (such as to “L1”) so that the signal from

the unit a

pp

ears on the TV screen

.

P

icture noise appears

.

• C

l

ean t

h

e

d

isc wit

h

a c

l

eanin

g

c

l

ot

h.

T

V program p

i

ctures are

d

istorte

d.

• Check i

f

all the connections are made correctly (page 18)

.

Pla

y

back picture is distorted

.

• Keep the device which ma

y

cause electrical disturbances, such as a cellular

phone awa

y.

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

picture or TV program

f

r

o

m

t

h

e

de

vi

ce

co

nn

ected

t

h

roug

h

t

h

e unit is

d

istorte

d.

• I

f

the pla

y

back picture output

f

rom a DVD pla

y

er, VCR or tuner goes through

the unit be

f

ore reaching your TV, the copy-protection signal applied to some

programs could a

ff

ect picture qualit

y

. Disconnect the pla

y

back device in

question an

d

connect it

d

irect

l

y to your TV

.

Cannot recor

d

a TV program. • T

h

is unit

d

oes not

h

ave a tuner to receive TV

b

roa

d

casting

.

• You must connect t

h

is unit to an externa

l

tuner to recor

d

TV programs

(

page 18

).

Sou

n

d

Th

ere is no soun

d.

• C

l

ean t

h

e

d

isc wit

h

a c

l

eaning c

l

ot

h.

• Re-connect a

ll

connections secure

l

y

.

• Check i

f

the connecting cord is damaged

.

• Check the connections to the ampli

f

ier input

.

• The input device setting on the ampli

f

ier is incorrect

.

• T

h

e unit is in pause mo

d

e or in s

l

ow-motion p

l

ay

b

ac

k

mo

d

e

.

• The unit is in

f

ast

f

orward or

f

ast reverse mode

.

• I

f

the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPU

T

(COAXIAL) jac

k

, c

h

ec

k

t

h

e setting in “Au

d

io Out” (page 85)

.

No DTS sound on di

g

ital output

.

• Chan

g

e the settin

g

menu for DTS® to ON

.

No DTS sound

f

rom analog

o

u

t

pu

t

• T

h

is unit

h

as no ana

l

og soun

d

output w

h

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

t

h

e se

l

ecte

d

DTS

soun

d

mo

d

e

.

S

oun

d

is noisy

.

• C

l

ean t

h

e

d

isc wit

h

a c

l

eaning c

l

ot

h.

R

e

m

ote

co

n

t

r

ol

Th

e remote contro

l

d

oes not

f

unction

.

• Batteries are wea

k.

• T

h

ere are o

b

stac

l

es

b

etween t

h

e remote contro

l

an

d

t

h

e unit

.

• The remote control is

f

ar

f

rom the unit

.

• T

h

ere are no

b

atteries in t

h

e remote contro

l.

• Check i

f

the unit is turned on

.

• The remote control is not pointed at the in

f

rared sensor window on the unit

.

Pla

y

bac

k

Th

e

d

isc

d

oes not p

l

ay

b

ac

k.

• No

d

isc is inserte

d.

• A

bl

an

k

d

isc is inserte

d.

• The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side

f

acing up

.

• T

h

e

d

isc is not correct

l

y inserte

d.

• T

h

e unit cannot p

l

ay

b

ac

k

certain

d

iscs (suc

h

as a CD-ROM) (page 10)

.

• T

h

e region co

d

e on t

h

e DVD-vi

d

eo

d

oes not matc

h

t

h

e unit (page 10)

.

• Moisture

h

as con

d

ense

d

insi

d

e t

h

e unit. Remove t

h

e

d

isc an

d

l

eave t

h

e unit

turned on

f

or about 2 hours until the moisture evaporates (page 4)

.

• I

f

the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot play back the

disc i

f

it was not

f

inalized

.

Pla

y

back image freezes for a

seco

n

d.

• During the pla

y

back of 2 la

y

ered disc, picture ma

y

freeze for a moment when

the 1st la

y

er switches to the 2nd la

y

er. This is not a malfunction

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 93E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 93 2009/12/14 18:34:102009/12/14 18:34:10

94

EN

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy

P

l

ay

b

ac

k

Th

e

d

isc

d

oes not start p

l

a

yb

ac

k

f

rom the be

g

innin

g.

• Resume p

l

ay

b

ac

k

was activate

d

(page 54). Press

[

STOP

C

]

tw

i

ce.

• You

h

ave inserte

d

a

d

isc w

h

ose tit

l

e menu or DVD menu automatica

lly

appears on the TV screen when it is

f

irst inserted

.

T

he unit starts pla

y

ing back the

disc automaticall

y.

• The DVD-video features an auto pla

y

back function

.

Some functions such as stop,

searc

h

, or s

l

ow-motion p

l

a

yb

ac

k

cannot be

p

er

f

ormed

.

• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the operations.

Re

f

er to the instruction manual supplied with the disc

.

T

he language

f

or the sound trac

k

cannot

b

e c

h

ange

d.

• T

h

e tit

l

es

d

oes not

h

ave t

h

e mu

l

ti

l

ingua

l

au

d

io trac

k

s

.

• The DVD-video prohibits the changing o

f

the language

f

or the sound track

.

T

he subtitle lan

g

ua

g

e cannot be

chan

g

ed or turned off

.

• Multilin

g

ual subtitle are not recorded on the DVD-video

.

T

he angles cannot be changed

.

• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD-video being pla

y

ed back

.

• T

h

e ang

l

e-c

h

ange operation is w

h

enever possi

bl

e as

l

ong as t

h

e

d

isc contains

a multi-an

g

le portion. Actual chan

g

e will be performed when the portion has

come u

p.

• The DVD-video prohibits chan

g

in

g

an

g

les

.

• Try changing the angle using the DVD-video’s menu

.

Recor

d

ing / Timer recor

d

ing / E

d

iting

External in

p

ut

p

osition (L1/L2)

cannot

b

e c

h

ange

d

w

h

i

l

e

recor

d

in

g.

• This unit is desi

g

ned so. This is not a mal

f

unction

.

Not

h

ing was recor

d

e

d

even

t

h

oug

h

you set t

h

e timer setting

correct

l

y

.

• There was a power

f

ailure during recording

.

• The unit’s internal clock stopped due to a power

f

ailure that lasted

f

or more

t

h

an 30 secon

d

s. Reset t

h

e c

l

oc

k

(page 25)

.

• T

h

e program contains copy protection signa

l

s t

h

at restricts copying

.

• T

h

e timer setting over

l

appe

d

wit

h

anot

h

er setting t

h

at

h

as priority

.

Recordin

g

does not stop

i

mmediatel

y

after

y

ou press

[

STOP

C

]

.

• It will take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before recordin

g

sto

p

s

.

T

imer recor

d

in

g

is not comp

l

ete

o

r

d

i

d

n

ot

sta

r

t

f

r

o

m

t

h

e

be

g

innin

g.

• T

h

e timer setting over

l

appe

d

wit

h

anot

h

er setting t

h

at

h

as priorit

y

(page 41)

.

• Disc space was not enou

g

h

.

• “Make Recordin

g

Compatible“ is not set to “ON”, when recordin

g

onto

DVD+RW

/

+R t

h

at was recor

d

e

d

on ot

h

er unit.

DV

DV signal cannot be input

.

• Before connection, turn on the

p

ower su

pp

lies for both this unit and the DVC,

an

d

ma

k

e sure t

h

at t

h

ese units are in sto

p

mo

d

e

.

• Onl

y

a “DVC-SD” signal can be input

f

rom the DVC to this unit. Other t

y

pes o

f

si

g

nals are not supported

.

• Do not connect an

y

device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC with

another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not o

p

erate

.

• If the DVC is not recognized after connection, turn off the power suppl

y

for

the

u

ni

t

a

n

d

r

e

-

co

nn

ect

the

DV

C.

Th

e DVC cannot

b

e operate

d

wit

h

t

h

is unit

.

• Signal input or DVC operation

f

rom this unit may be disabled depending on

the type o

f

DVC

.

• I

f

a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input (L1 (Rear)/L2 (Front))

f

or

ana

l

og connection via au

d

io/vi

d

eo ca

bl

es

.

• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type o

f

DVC, even in a mode

ot

h

er t

h

an camera mo

d

e. In t

h

is case, switc

h

to DVD contro

l

an

d

execute t

h

e

norma

l

recor

d

ing proce

d

ure w

h

i

l

e operating t

h

e DVC

.

Ce

r

ta

in f

u

n

ct

i

o

n

s

o

f

t

h

e

u

ni

t

cannot o

p

erate

.

• Some functions ma

y

not operate depending on the t

y

pe of DVC. For

example, if the DVC does not support slow pla

y

back mode, the slow pla

y

bac

k

f

u

n

ct

i

o

n i

s

d

i

sab

l

ed.

• With L3 (DV-IN), the disc displa

y

menu does not appear unless disc pla

y

bac

k

i

s

e

x

ecuted.

DV audio si

g

nal cannot be

s

wi

tc

h

ed.

• For recordin

g

with the DVC, the recordin

g

audio si

g

nal can be set to 12 bits

or 16 bits. However, when 16-bit recordin

g

mode is selected, audio si

g

nal

cannot be switched. To record an audio si

g

nal, set it to 12 bits

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 94E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 94 2009/12/14 18:34:112009/12/14 18:34:11

95

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Remedy

H

D

M

I

No ima

g

e

f

rom HDMI connection

.

• Check the HDMI connection.

(

Check the status o

f

the HDMI related

in

d

ications.

)

• Check whether the connected monitor device or other device supports

HDCP. (T

h

is unit wi

ll

not output a vi

d

eo signa

l

un

l

ess t

h

e ot

h

er

d

evice

supports HDCP.

)

• Check the setting o

f

HDMI

.

• Check whether the output

f

ormat o

f

this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches the

supported input

f

ormat o

f

other connected device

.

• I

f

the unit is connected to the unauthorized display device with an HDMI

ca

bl

e, t

h

e au

d

io/vi

d

eo signa

l

may not

b

e output w

h

en p

l

aying

b

ac

k

a

commercia

l

DVD-vi

d

eo

.

T

h

e

r

e

i

s

n

o

sou

n

d

o

r

t

h

e

sou

n

d

i

s

d

i

sto

r

ted.

• The HDMI sound is not out

p

ut when “HDMI Audio” is set to “OFF”

.

• Check the RCA audio cable connection. I

f

you are using HDMI-DVI conversion

ca

bl

e,

y

ou must connect t

h

e RCA au

d

io ca

bl

e, too

.

• Check whether the out

p

ut

f

ormat o

f

this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches the

supported input

f

ormat o

f

other connected device

.

O

t

h

er

s

T

he unit does not operate

proper

ly.

• When static electricit

y

, etc., causes the unit to operate abnormall

y

, unplug

t

h

e unit an

d

t

h

en p

l

ug it in again

.

Th

e

d

isc tray

d

oes not open w

h

en

y

o

u

press

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

.

• It may take a

f

ew seconds

f

or the disc tray to open a

f

ter you have recorded or

e

d

ite

d

a

d

isc. T

h

is is

b

ecause t

h

e unit is a

dd

ing

d

isc

d

ata to t

h

e

d

isc

.

“

Repairin

g

” appears on the T

V

sc

r

ee

n

.

Repairing

• If there is a power failure or unplu

gg

in

g

durin

g

recordin

g

, finalizin

g

,

formattin

g

or editin

g

(even after “Repairin

g

” disappears), a repairin

g

process

will begin automaticall

y

just after turning the unit on again

.

It ma

y

take several minutes up to about several hours

.

In case

y

ou intend to cancel the

repa

i

r

i

n

g

process

.

• I

f

y

ou intend to cancel the repairing process, press

[

A

O

PEN/CLOSE

]

on the front

p

anel, then select “Yes” and

p

ress

[

ENTER

]

. After that,

p

ress

[

OPEN/CLOSE

A

]

to

ta

k

e

out

t

h

e

d

i

sc.

The disc canceled durin

g

the

repairin

g

process MAY NOT wor

k

.

Repairing

Do you want to cancel a repairing

process ? When selecting “Yes”,

the disc may not be usable.

Yes

No

Error message Cause Solution

D

i

sc

Err

o

r

— Please e

j

ect the disc.

—

Pla

y

back

f

eature ma

y

not be available on this disc

.

•

Unp

l

a

y

a

bl

e

d

isc is inserte

d

in t

h

e unit.

•

The disc is u

p

side down. • In

se

r

t

the

sta

n

da

r

d

iz

ed

d

i

sc

w

h

i

ch

ha

v

e

the marks on pa

g

es 9-10

.

•

Insert the disc with the labeled side

f

acing up

.

Un

k

nown USB Device/Fi

le

— P

lease

R

e

m

o

v

e

the

US

B

.

—

Insert a compati

bl

e USB

d

evice.

•

Format o

f

the

f

iles in the connected

U

SB

d

evice are not supporte

d

.

•

Incompati

bl

e USB

d

evice is connecte

d

.

• Insert a compati

bl

e USB

d

evice wit

h

supported

f

ile

f

ormat. I

f

this does not

solve the problem, use other type o

f

compati

bl

e USB

d

evice

.

Re

g

ion Erro

r

— Please e

j

ect the disc.

—

Pla

y

back is not authorized in

y

our region.

•

Pla

y

back is not authorized in the region

o

f the DVD-video which

y

ou inserted in

t

h

e

u

ni

t.

• Insert the DVD-video with re

g

ion codes

1

o

r ALL

.

P

a

r

e

n

ta

l L

oc

k

On

T

h

e current se

l

ecte

d

p

arenta

l

eve

l

prohibits pla

y

back

.

•

The current selected

p

arental level

p

ro

h

i

b

its p

l

a

yb

ac

k.

• Check “Parental Lock” settin

g

in

“

P

l

a

yb

ac

k

” menu (page 84)

.

Recor

d

ing Erro

r

Th

is pro

g

ram is not a

ll

owe

d

to

b

e recor

d

e

d.

•

You are trying to recor

d

t

h

e copy

p

ro

h

i

b

ite

d

pro

g

ram. • You cannot recor

d

copy pro

h

i

b

ite

d

programs.

Recordin

g

Erro

r

This pro

g

ram is not recordable in Video

m

ode.

•

You are tr

y

ing to record the cop

y

-once

p

ro

g

ram onto the DVD-RW disc in video

mode.

• Set “Format Mode” to “VR mode” (pa

g

e

27

).

Recor

d

in

g

Erro

r

This pro

g

ram is not recordable in +VR mode

.

•

You are tr

y

ing to recor

d

t

h

e cop

y

-once

p

ro

g

ram. • In

se

r

t

the

DVD-RW

d

i

sc

in VR m

ode

(ver.1.1 or 1.2 com

p

atible with CPRM)

.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 95E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 95 2009/12/14 18:34:112009/12/14 18:34:11

96

EN

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error message Cause Solution

Recording Error

Ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

o

n

th

i

s

d

i

sc.

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the disc

w

h

ic

h

is unrecor

d

a

bl

e

,

or t

h

e

d

isc status

i

s una

bl

e to recor

d

.

•

The disc is dirt

y

.

•

T

h

e

d

isc is

d

amage

d.

• Insert the recordable disc, and ensure

the disc status satis

f

ies the recording

requirements

(

pa

g

e 9

).

• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth

.

• Re

pl

ace t

h

e

d

isc

.

Recording Error

T

h

is pro

g

ram is not a

ll

owe

d

to

b

e

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

th

i

s

d

i

sc.

•

You are tr

y

ing to record the cop

y

-once

p

ro

g

ram onto t

h

e DVD-RW

d

isc w

h

ic

h

i

s not compati

bl

e wit

h

CPRM.

• In

se

r

t

h

e

DVD-RW

d

i

sc

in VR m

ode

(ver.1.1 or 1.2 com

p

ati

bl

e wit

h

CPRM)

.

Recor

d

ing Error

T

h

is

d

isc is protecte

d

an

d

not recor

d

a

bl

e

.

•

You are trying to recor

d

on to t

h

e protecte

d

isc w

h

ic

h

is set in “DVD Menu” menu.

• Re

l

ease t

h

e

d

isc protect setting in “DVD

Menu” menu

(

page 29

).

Recordin

g

Error

Di

sc

i

s

f

u

ll

.

(No area for new recordin

g)

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the disc

w

hich has no space for recordin

g.

• Insert the recordable disc with enou

g

h

recordin

g

space

.

Recor

d

in

g

Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

m

o

r

e

tha

n 99

t

i

tles

o

n

o

n

e

d

i

sc.

(

T

h

e maximum is 99

)

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e DVD-RW/-R

o

n which the number o

f

recording titles

c

omes u

p

to t

h

e maximum (99).

• De

l

ete unnecessary tit

l

es (pages 67-68)

.

Recor

d

ing Error

You cannot recor

d

more t

h

an 999 c

h

apters on one

d

isc.

(T

h

e maximum is 999

)

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e VR mo

d

e

D

VD-RW on which the number o

f

recording

ch

apters comes up to t

h

e maximum (999)

.

• De

l

ete unnecessary c

h

apter mar

k

s

(

page 73

).

Recordin

g

Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

m

o

r

e

t

h

a

n 49

t

i

t

l

es

o

n

o

n

e

d

i

sc.

(

The maximum is 49

)

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the DVD+RW/+R

o

n which the number of recordin

g

titles

c

omes u

p

to the maximum (49).

• Delete unnecessar

y

titles (pages 67-68)

.

Recor

d

in

g

Error

You cannot recor

d

more t

h

an 254 c

h

apters on one

d

isc.

(

T

h

e maximum is 254

)

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e DVD+RW

o

n which the number o

f

recording

ch

a

p

ters comes u

p

to t

h

e maximum (254).

• De

l

ete unnecessary c

h

apter mar

k

s

(

page 73

).

Recordin

g

Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

o

n

t

hi

s

d

i

sc

as

Co

n

t

r

o

l

Inf

o

rm

at

i

o

n i

s

f

u

ll

.

•

T

his disc has no s

p

ace to write the Control

I

nformation when recordin

g

or deletin

g

contents

.

W

hen editing has been repeatedl

y

performed,

t

he control Information area ma

y

come up to be

f

ull even the recordin

g

area has enou

g

h space

.

• Delete unnecessar

y

titles (pages 67-68)

.

Recordin

g

Error

Y

ou

ca

nn

ot

r

eco

r

d

o

n

t

hi

s

d

i

sc

as

P

o

w

e

r

Ca

li

b

r

at

i

o

n Ar

ea

i

s

f

u

ll

.

•

W

hen recordin

g

s are performed

r

epeatedl

y

onto an unstable disc, this

a

rea ma

y

come up to be full.

•

E

ver

y

time

y

ou insert a disc for recording,

t

he disc’s workin

g

area will be taken up.

A

nd if

y

ou repeat this frequentl

y

, it will

b

e used up sooner and

y

ou ma

y

not be

ab

l

e

to

r

eco

r

d

f

u

ll 49

t

i

t

l

es.

• In

se

r

t

a

n

e

w

d

i

sc.

Recordin

g

Error

This disc is alread

y

f

inalized

.

•

You are tr

y

ing to record onto the disc

a

lread

y

f

inalized. • Undo the finalizin

g

for this disc

(pa

g

e 32)

.

Recor

d

ing Error

T

h

e

d

isc

h

as no recor

d

ing compati

b

i

l

ity.

(Set “Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e” to

“ON” to convert t

h

e

d

isc menu.

)

•

You are trying to recor

d

onto t

h

e

u

n

f

in

a

liz

ed

+VR m

ode

d

i

scs

r

eco

r

ded

o

n

othe

r

u

ni

t.

• Set “Ma

k

e Recor

d

ing Compati

bl

e” to

“ON” to rewrite the menu, a

f

ter that you

wi

ll

recor

d

to

d

isc (page 34).

* I

f

you are still having trouble with the unit a

f

ter checking “TROUBLESHOOTING”, write down the error code and the

e

rror description

f

or calling our help line to locate an Authorized Service Center

.

– Can I recor

d

to CD-RW/-R? No, t

h

is unit recor

d

s on

l

y DVD.

– Can I play back DVD-video that is bought in another country? Possible when the region code o

f

the disc is 1 and All

.

– Can I connect t

h

e unit to my PC? No, you cannot contro

l

t

h

e unit

b

y PC.

– Can I pro

g

ram a timer recor

d

in

g

wit

h

ca

bl

e/sate

ll

ite

b

ox?

Y

es,

y

ou can. Se

l

ect “L1 (Rear)” or “L2 (Front)” as

y

our

r

ecor

d

ing c

h

anne

l

, an

d

l

eave t

h

e ca

bl

e/sate

ll

ite

b

ox on

(

pages 18, 26 an

d

38-41)

.

Frequentl

y

Asked Questio

ns

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 96E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 96 2009/12/14 18:34:122009/12/14 18:34:12

9

7

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

LANGUAGE CODE

Language Code

Abkhazia

n

474

8

Af

ar

4747

A

f

rikaan

s

475

2

A

lba

ni

an

6563

Am

h

ari

c

475

9

Ar

ab

i

c

47

64

Arm

e

n

ian

5

47

1

A

ssames

e

47

65

A

y

mar

a

4771

Azerbai

j

an

i

4772

Bas

hk

i

r

4

8

4

7

B

asqu

e

51

67

Ben

g

ali;Ban

g

l

a

4

860

Bh

uta

n

i

50

7

2

Bi

h

ar

i

4

8

5

4

Bi

s

l

a

m

a

4

855

Br

eton

4

864

Bu

l

garia

n

4

8

5

3

B

urmes

e

5

9

7

1

B

y

elorussia

n

4

851

Ca

m

bod

i

an

5

7

59

Cata

l

a

n

4

9

4

7

C

hin

ese

72

54

Co

r

s

i

can

4

961

C

r

oat

i

an

5

4

64

C

z

ech

49

65

D

a

ni

sh

50

4

7

D

utch

6058

Eng

l

is

h

516

0

Es

p

erant

o

5

1

61

E

sto

ni

an

5

1

66

F

aroes

e

5

2

6

1

Fi

ji

5

2

56

Finni

sh

5

2

55

Frenc

h

5

2

6

4

Fr

i

s

i

a

n

5

2

7

1

G

a

li

c

i

an

5358

G

eorgia

n

5747

G

erma

n

5

0

5

1

Gr

eek

5

1

58

Gr

ee

nl

a

n

d

i

c

5

7

58

G

uaran

i

5

3

6

0

Gu

j

arat

i

5367

Hausa

5

44

7

H

eb

r

ew

5569

Hin

di

5455

Language Code

Hun

g

aria

n

5

4

67

I

cela

n

d

i

c

5565

Indonesia

n

5

56

0

Inter

l

ingu

a

5547

Inter

l

ingu

e

5551

Inu

p

ia

k

5557

Iri

sh

53

4

7

Ita

l

ia

n

5

66

J

a

p

anes

e

56

4

7

Ja

v

a

n

ese

5669

Kanna

da

5

76

0

Kas

h

mir

i

5

7

65

K

a

z

a

k

h

5

7

57

Kinyarwand

a

6

4

69

Kirg

h

i

z

5771

Kir

u

n

di

6

4

60

K

o

r

ean

5

7

61

Kur

d

is

h

5

7

67

Laot

h

ia

n

58

6

1

L

atin

58

4

7

Latvian

;

Lettis

h

5868

Linga

la

58

6

0

Li

t

h

ua

ni

an

5866

M

acedo

ni

an

5957

Ma

l

agas

y

5953

Mala

y

5

9

65

Mala

y

ala

m

5

9

58

M

altese

5966

Maor

i

59

5

M

a

r

at

h

i

5

9

64

M

o

l

da

vi

an

5961

Mongo

l

ia

n

59

6

0

N

au

r

u

60

4

7

Ne

p

al

i

6051

Norweg

i

a

n

60

6

1

O

ccita

n

6

14

9

Ori

ya

6

1

64

Oromo (A

f

an)

6

1

59

Panja

bi

62

4

7

Pashto

;

Pusht

o

6

2

65

Pe

r

s

i

an

5

24

7

Po

l

is

h

62

5

8

Portu

g

ues

e

6

2

66

Q

uechu

a

6367

R

haeto

-R

o

m

a

n

ce

6

4

59

R

omania

n

6

4

61

Language Code

R

ussia

n

6

4

67

Sa

m

oan

6559

S

an

g

h

o

655

3

Sa

n

sk

ri

t

65

4

7

S

cots Gae

l

i

c

5

3

5

0

Se

r

b

i

an

6564

Se

r

bo

-

C

r

oat

i

an

6554

S

esot

ho

6

5

66

Sets

w

a

n

a

6660

S

h

o

n

a

6560

S

in

dhi

655

0

S

ing

h

a

l

es

e

6

55

5

S

i

s

w

at

6565

S

l

o

v

ak

6557

Sl

ovenia

n

655

8

So

m

a

li

6561

Sp

anis

h

5

1

65

S

un

d

anes

e

6

5

67

S

wa

h

i

li

656

9

S

w

ed

i

sh

6568

T

aga

l

o

g

6658

T

aji

k

665

3

Ta

mil

66

4

7

Tata

r

6666

T

e

l

ug

u

6651

T

h

ai

6654

T

i

betan

4

861

Ti

gr

i

n

ya

6655

T

onga

6661

T

son

ga

6665

Tu

rki

sh

6664

T

ur

k

me

n

66

5

7

Twi

6669

U

kr

a

ini

an

6

7

57

U

r

d

u

6

7

64

U

z

b

e

k

677

2

V

i

et

n

a

m

ese

6855

V

o

l

a

p

u

k

6861

W

e

l

s

h

4

9

7

1

Wo

l

o

f

6

9

61

X

h

osa

7

054

Y

i

dd

is

h

5

6

5

Yo

r

uba

71

61

Zu

l

u

7

267

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 97E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 97 2009/12/14 18:34:122009/12/14 18:34:12

98

EN

A

na

l

o

g

Au

d

i

o

g

An e

l

ectrica

l

signa

l

t

h

at

d

irect

ly

represents soun

d

.

C

ompare t

h

is to

d

igita

l

au

d

io w

h

ic

h

can

b

e an e

l

ectrica

l

signal, but is an indirect representation o

f

sound. See also

“Digita

l

Au

d

io”

.

A

s

p

ect Rati

o

p

T

he width of a TV screen relative to its hei

g

ht.

C

onventiona

l

TVs are 4:3 (in ot

h

er wor

d

s

,

t

h

e TV screen

i

s a

l

most s

q

uare); wi

d

escreen mo

d

e

l

s are 16:9 (t

h

e T

V

screen is almost twice as wide as it is hi

g

h)

.

Cha

p

ter

p

J

ust as a book is s

p

lit u

p

into several cha

p

ters, a title on a

DVD is usuall

y

divided into chapters. See also “Title”

.

Com

p

onent Vi

d

eo Out

p

ut

pp

Each si

g

nal of luminance (Y) and component (P

B

/

C

B

,

P

R

/

C

R

) is independent to output so that

y

ou can experience

p

icture color as it is

.

Also, due to compatibilit

y

with progressive video (480p),

y

ou can experience higher-densit

y

picture than that in

i

nterlace

(

480i

).

Di

g

ita

l

Au

d

i

o

g

An indirect representation of sound b

y

numbers. During

recordin

g

, the sound is measured at discrete intervals

(44,100 times a second for CD audio) b

y

an analog-

to-di

g

ital converter,

g

eneratin

g

a stream of numbers.

O

n pla

y

back, a digital-to-analog converter generates

a

n analo

g

si

g

nal based on these numbers. See also

“Sampling Frequenc

y

” and “Analog Audio”.

Do

lby

Di

g

ita

l

yg

T

he s

y

stem to compress digital sound developed b

y

Dolb

y

Laboratories. It offers

y

ou sound of stereo(2ch) or

m

u

l

t

i

c

h

a

nn

e

l

aud

i

o.

DTS® (Di

g

ita

l

T

h

eater S

y

stem)

gy

DTS® is a mu

l

ti c

h

anne

l

surroun

d

soun

d

system. By

connecting to DTS

d

eco

d

er you can enjoy

d

ynamic an

d

rea

l

istic soun

d

l

i

k

e movie t

h

eatre. DTS surroun

d

soun

d

tec

h

no

l

ogies were

d

eve

l

ope

d

b

y DTS, Inc

.

Fin

al

iz

e

T

o ma

k

e DVD, w

h

ic

h

ave

b

een recor

d

e

d

on, possi

bl

e to

p

l

ay

b

ac

k

in DVD p

l

ayers.

HDMI™ (hi

g

h de

f

inition multimedia inter

f

ace)

g

A digital inter

f

ace between audio and video source. It can

transmit component vi

d

eo, au

d

io, an

d

contro

l

signa

l

wit

h

one ca

bl

e connection

.

JPEG (joint photographic experts group)

jpgp pgp

J

PEG is a method o

f

compressing still image

f

iles. You can

cop

y

JPEG

f

iles on CD-RW/-R

f

rom a computer and pla

y

back the

f

iles on this unit

.

M

P3 (MPEG audio la

y

er 3)

y

MP3 is a method o

f

compressing

f

iles. You can cop

y

MP3

f

il

es

o

n

C

D-

R

W

/

-R

f

rom the computer and pla

y

back the

f

il

es

o

n

t

hi

s

u

ni

t.

PCM (

p

u

l

se co

d

e mo

d

u

l

ation

)

p

The most common s

y

stem o

f

encoding digital audio,

f

ound on CD and DAT. Excellent qualit

y

, but requires a

lot o

f

data compared to

f

ormats such as Dolby Digital

an

d

MPEG au

d

io. For compati

b

i

l

ity wit

h

d

igita

l

au

d

io

recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV ampli

f

iers with

d

igita

l

inputs, t

h

is unit can convert Do

lby

Digita

l

an

d

MPEG au

d

io to PCM. See a

l

so “Digita

l

Au

d

io”

.

Pro

g

ressive Scan (480

p)

gp

A t

y

pe o

f

displa

y

that does not split each

f

rame into

fields, and instead scans directl

y

through all the scanlines

of each frame in order. Pro

g

ressive scan provides less

flickerin

g

and hi

g

her ima

g

e resolution than traditional

(480i) TV si

g

nals. Re

f

er to pa

g

e 89

f

or instructions on

selective pro

g

ressive scan mode

.

Re

g

ion Code

g

Regions associate discs and pla

y

ers with particular areas

of the world. This unit will onl

y

pla

y

back discs that have

compatible re

g

ion codes. You can find the re

g

ion code

of

y

our unit b

y

looking on the rear panel. Some discs are

compatible with more than one re

g

ion (or all re

g

ions)

.

Sam

pl

in

g

Fre

q

uenc

y

pg q y

The rate which sound is measured b

y

a specified interval

to turn into di

g

ital audio data. The numbers of samplin

g

in one second defines as sampling frequenc

y

. The higher

the rate, the better the sound qualit

y.

S-Vi

d

eo Out

p

ut

p

It delivers independentl

y

each signal of color(C) and

luminance(Y) to TV as video signals, so that higher-qualit

y

picture will be

g

ained

.

Tit

l

e (DVD on

ly

)

y

A collection of cha

p

ters on DVD. See also “Cha

p

ter”

.

Tr

ack

Audio CD use tracks to divide up the content o

f

a disc.

T

h

e DVD equiva

l

ent is ca

ll

e

d

a c

h

apter. See a

l

so “C

h

apter”.

Vi

deo

m

ode

Video mode is the same recording

f

ormat as used on

t

h

e DVD vi

d

eos you purc

h

ase in

l

oca

l

s

h

ops. You can

play back the discs recorded in this

f

ormat in most DVD

players, however it o

ff

ers only limited editing. You will

need to

f

inalize discs recorded in video mode be

f

ore

p

l

aying t

h

em

b

ac

k

on ot

h

er unit

.

VR m

ode

A basic recording

f

ormat

f

or DVD-RW. VR mode o

ff

ers

a

d

vance

d

e

d

iting,

h

owever it is p

l

aya

bl

e on

l

y on VR

mo

d

e compati

bl

e unit. Fina

l

ization is recommen

d

e

d

be

f

ore playing them back on other unit

.

+VR m

ode

A recording

f

ormat

f

or DVD+RW/+R. +VR mode o

ff

ers basic

e

d

iting, an

d

it is p

l

aya

bl

e on most DVD p

l

ayers. Fina

l

ization

is recommended be

f

ore pla

y

ing them back on other unit

.

GLOSSARY

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 98E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 98 2009/12/14 18:34:132009/12/14 18:34:13

99

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

SPECIFICATIONS

General

Power re

q

uirement

s

A

C

120 V

,

60 H

z

P

ower consumptio

n

20 W (stan

db

y: 2.6 W

)

Wei

g

h

t

4.86 lbs ( 2.2 k

g

)

Dimensions (wi

d

t

h

x

h

eig

h

t x

d

ept

h

) 16.6” x 2.4” x 10.2”

(

420 x 59.0 x 259 mm

)

O

peratin

g

temperatur

e

41 °F to 104 °F

(

5 °C to 40 °C

)

Operating humidit

y

Less than 80%

(

no condensation

)

T

V syste

m

NT

SC

TV

sta

n

da

r

d

Recording

Recordin

g

forma

t

VR (video recordin

g

) forma

t

Vi

deo

f

o

rm

at

+VR f

o

rm

at

Recor

d

ing

d

isc

s

DVD-Rewrita

bl

e/-Recor

d

a

bl

e, DVD+Rewrita

bl

e/+Recor

d

a

ble

Video recordin

g

f

orma

t

Sampling

f

requenc

y

Com

p

ression

f

orma

t

1

3.5

MH

z

MPE

G

A

udio recording

f

orma

t

Sampling

f

requenc

y

Compression

f

orma

t

48

k

H

z

Do

lb

y Digita

l

/LPCM (XP Recor

d

ing mo

d

e on

l

y

)

Input / Output

Vi

d

eo inpu

t

Input

l

eve

l

J

ac

ks

Input 1 (rear), 2 (

f

ront)

1 Vp-p

(

75Ω

)

RCA jac

k

Video out

p

u

t

Out

p

ut leve

l

Jack

Out

p

ut 1 (rear)

1 V

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

RCA

j

ac

k

S-video inpu

t

Y

(luminance) - Input level

C (color) - Input level

J

ack

s

Input 1

(

rear

)

1 Vp-p

(

75Ω

)

286 mVp-p

(

75Ω

)

4 pin mini DI

N

S-video out

p

u

t

Y

(luminance) - Out

p

ut leve

l

C (color) - Out

p

ut leve

l

Jack

Out

p

ut 1 (rear)

1 V

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

286 mV

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

4

p

in mini DI

N

USB

i

n

p

u

t

TYPE A

US

B 2

.0

C

om

p

onent video out

p

u

t

Out

p

ut leve

l

Jac

k

s

Out

p

ut 1 (rear)

Y: 1.0 V

p

-

p

(75Ω),

P

B

/C

B

,

P

R

/C

R

: 0.7 V

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

RCA

j

ack

s

H

D

MI outpu

t

Jack

HDMI

j

ac

k

A

udio in

p

u

t

Durin

g

audio inpu

t

Jac

k

s

In

p

ut 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R

2 V rms (in

p

ut im

p

edance: more than 22 kΩ

)

RCA

j

ack

s

A

u

d

io outpu

t

Durin

g

au

d

io outpu

t

Jacks

Output 1

(

rear

)

L/

R

2 V rms (output impe

d

ance:

l

ess t

h

an 1

k

Ω

)

RCA jac

ks

Di

g

ital audio outpu

t

Out

p

ut leve

l

Jack

Out

p

ut 1 (rear) COAXIA

L

500 mV

p

-

p

(75Ω

)

RCA

j

ac

k

DV

i

npu

t

J

ac

k

IEEE 139

4

DV input jack (4 pin

)

•

This model com

p

lies with the below s

p

eci

f

ications.

•

Designs and speci

f

ications are subject to change without notice

.

•

This model ma

y

not be compatible with features and/or specifications that ma

y

be added in the future.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 99E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 99 2009/12/14 18:34:132009/12/14 18:34:13

1

00

EN

LIMITED WARRANTY

Limited United

S

tates Warranty

Digital Audio Video (“DAV”) Product - Exchange Warranty

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.

THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DAV PRODUCT

AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA

AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED

IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited Warranty

TACP warrants this DAV Product and its parts against defects in

mate

rials

or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date

of original

retail purchase.

DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV

PRODUCT WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT WITHOUT

CHARGE TO YOU. DURING THE PERIOD THAT COMMENCES ON THE

DATE THAT IS NINETY ONE (91) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL

RETAIL PURCHASE AND ENDS ON THE DATE THAT IS THREE HUNDRED

SIXTY FIVE (365) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL

PURCHASE, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV PRODUCT

WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT FOR A FEE.

Rental Units

The warranty for DAV Product rental units begins on the date of the first

rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,

whichever comes first.

Commercial Units

DAV Products sold and used for commercial purposes have a limited

warranty for all parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date of

original retail purchase and ends on the date that is ninety (90) days

thereafter.

Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card

Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DAV Product.

Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your

DAV Product on-line at www .tacp

.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible.

By registering your DAV Product you will enable TACP to bring you new

products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact

you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the U.S.

Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product

registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this DAV Product must be made pursuant

to the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program.

(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the DAV Product is

purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.

(6) This warranty does not cover Product sold AS IS or WITH ALL

FAULTS.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer

controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are

not covered

by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate

antenna

systems are your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as

limited above, and do not extend to any DAV Product or parts that

have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DAV Product

or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as

lightning or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation,

improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by

TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DAV Product

and connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had

the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking

the section “TROUBLESHOOTING,” you find that service is needed:

(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service for your DAV Product

under the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program, contact

TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.

(2) You must include the original bill of sale (or a copy of the original bill

of sale) or other proof of purchase along with the entire DAV Product

when sending the DAV Product to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center

specified by TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center. You are responsible

for all inbound transportation and insurance charges for the DAV Product

to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center.

For additional information, visit TACP’s website: www.tacp.toshiba.com

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.

S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET

FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY WARRANTIES

IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY

LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU

OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND

SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR

OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE

LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,

OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY

USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DAV PRODUCT).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,

modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any

obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law

of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90)

days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect.

This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under state law.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU

MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO

STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN

AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE

PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 100E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 100 2009/12/14 18:34:132009/12/14 18:34:13

10

1

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

LIMITED WARRANTY

/LPLWHG&DQDGLDQ:DUUDQW\

)RU7RVKLED%UDQG'LJLWDO$XGLR9LGHR3URGXFWV

7RVKLEDRI&DQDGD/LPLWHG7&/PDNHVWKHIROORZLQJOLPLWHGZDUUDQWLHVWRRULJLQDOFRQVXPHUVLQ&DQDGD7+(6(/,0,7('

:$55$17,(6(;7(1'727+(25,*,1$/&21680(5385&+$6(525$1<3(56215(&(,9,1*7+,6726+,%$%5$1'

',*,7$/$8',29,'(2352'8&7WKH'$9352'8&76RU'$93URGXFWV$6$*,)7)5207+(25,*,1$/&21680(5

385&+$6(5$1'721227+(5385&+$6(52575$16)(5((

'$9352'8&76385&+$6(',1&$1$'$$1'86('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,21

7+(81,7('67$7(6$1'0(;,&2$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6

'$9352'8&76385&+$6('$1<:+(5(2876,'(2)&$1$'$,1&/8',1*:,7+287/,0,7$7,217+(81,7('67$7(6

$1'0(;,&2$1'86(',1&$1$'$$5(127&29(5('%<7+(6(:$55$17,(6

/LPLWHG2QH<HDU:DUUDQW\RQ3DUWVDQG/DERXU

6XEMHFWWRWKHPRUHOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\LIWKH'$93URGXFWLVXVHGIRU

DQ\FRPPHUFLDORUEXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVVHWRXWEHORZ7&/

ZDUUDQWVWKH'$93URGXFWDQGLWVSDUWVDJDLQVWPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQ

PDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$93URGXFWIDLOLQJIRU

DSHULRGRIRQH\HDUDIWHUWKHGDWHRIRULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH

'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//$77&/·6237,215(3$,5

255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57:,7+$1(:25

5()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(72<28)25

3$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+((17,5('$9

352'8&772$7&/'$9352'8&7$87+25,=('6(59,&(

3529,'(5$63<2808673$<)25$//

75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(

'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63

5HQWDO8QLWV

7KHZDUUDQW\IRU'$93URGXFWUHQWDOXQLWVEHJLQVZLWKWKHGDWHRI

ILUVWUHQWDORUWKLUW\GD\VIURPWKHGDWHRIVKLSPHQWWRWKHUHQWDO

ILUPZKLFKHYHUFRPHVILUVW

/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\IRU&RPPHUFLDO8QLWV

7&/ZDUUDQWV'$93URGXFWVWKDWDUHXVHGIRUDQ\FRPPHUFLDORU

EXVLQHVVSXUSRVHVDVIROORZVDOOSDUWVDUHZDUUDQWHGDJDLQVW

PDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSWKDWUHVXOWLQWKH'$9

3URGXFWIDLOLQJIRUDSHULRGRIQLQHW\GD\VDIWHUWKHGDWHRI

RULJLQDOUHWDLOSXUFKDVH'85,1*7+,63(5,2'7&/:,//

$77&/·6237,215(3$,5255(3/$&($'()(&7,9(3$57

:,7+$1(:255()85%,6+('3$57:,7+287&+$5*(

72<28)253$57625/$%285<280867'(/,9(57+(

(17,5('$9352'8&772$1$63<2808673$<)25$//

75$163257$7,21$1',1685$1&(&+$5*(6)257+(

'$9352'8&772$1')5207+($63

<RXU5HVSRQVLELOLW\

7+($%29(:$55$17,(6$5(68%-(&7727+(

)2//2:,1*&21',7,216

<RXPXVWSURYLGH\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVH

$OOZDUUDQW\VHUYLFLQJRIWKLV'$93URGXFWPXVWEHSHUIRUPHG

E\DQ$63

7KHZDUUDQWLHVIURP7&/DUHHIIHFWLYHRQO\LIWKH'$93URGXFW

LVLSXUFKDVHGDVQHZDQGXQRSHQHGIURP7&/RUIURP7&/·V

DXWKRUL]HGGLVWULEXWRUVGHDOHUVRUUHVHOOHUV$'5·VDQGLL

ORFDWHGRSHUDWHGLQ&DQDGD

:DUUDQWLHVH[WHQGRQO\WRPDWHULDOGHIHFWVLQPDWHULDOVRU

ZRUNPDQVKLSDVOLPLWHGDERYHDQGGRQRWH[WHQGWR

D

E

6HUYLFHUHSDLUVRUUHSODFHPHQWPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\DFFLGHQW

PLVXVHDEXVHPRLVWXUHOLTXLGVGXVWGLUWQHJOHFWDFFLGHQW

GDPDJHDSSOLFDWLRQVLPSURSHULQVWDOODWLRQLPSURSHU

RSHUDWLRQLPSURSHUFOHDQLQJLPSURSHUPDLQWHQDQFHQRUPDO



ZHDUDQGWHDURUDQ\RWKHUH[WHUQDOFDXVHRUHYHQWDFWRU

RPLVVLRQRXWVLGHWKHFRQWURORI7&/LQFOXGLQJILUHWKHIWDFWV



RI*RGDOWHUDWLRQSRZHUIDLOXUHVSRZHUVXUJHVRUSRZHU

VKRUWDJHVOLJKWQLQJRWKHUHOHFWULFDOIDXOWVRUUHSDLUV

PRGLILFDWLRQVRUUHSODFHPHQWVE\SHUVRQVRWKHUWKDQWKRVH

DXWKRUL]HGE\7&/WRVHUYLFHWKH'$93URGXFW

5HSODFHPHQWRIPLVVLQJGLVFDUGHGRUORVWSDUWVWKH

SURYLVLRQRIUHWURILWVRUSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH

F 5HSDLURIGDPDJHWKDWLVFRVPHWLFRQO\RUGRHVQRWDIIHFW

WKH'$93URGXFWIXQFWLRQDOLW\VXFKDVZHDUDQGWHDU

VFUDWFKHVDQGGHQWV

G

H

6HUYLFHRQ7RVKLEDEUDQGHGDFFHVVRU\LWHPVVXFK

DFFHVVRU\LWHPVPD\EHFRYHUHGE\WKHLURZQZDUUDQW\

6HUYLFHRQWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWVRUVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\

E\XVHRILQFRPSDWLEOHWKLUGSDUW\SURGXFWV

I 6HUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHVLPXOWDQHRXVXVHRIWKLV

'$93URGXFWDQGFRQQHFWHGHTXLSPHQW

K 6HUYLFHRID'$93URGXFWRQZKLFKWKH726+,%$ODEHORU

ORJRUDWLQJODEHORUVHULDOQXPEHUKDYHEHHQGHIDFHGRU

UHPRYHG

L 2QVLWHVHUYLFHDQGUHSDLURIWKH'$93URGXFW

M 'DPDJHWRWKH'$93URGXFWFDXVHGE\IDLOXUHWRIROORZ

WKHVSHFLILFDWLRQV8VHUPDQXDOVRUJXLGHVDVWRXVDJH

DQGRUVWRUDJH

J 0RGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$93URGXFWQRWDSSURYHGLQZULWLQJ

E\7&/DQGVHUYLFHPDGHQHFHVVDU\E\WKHXVHRU

LQVWDOODWLRQRIQRQ7RVKLEDPRGLILFDWLRQVWRWKH'$9

3URGXFW

'LVFODLPHUDQG/LPLWDWLRQRI5HPHG\

<2808675($'$1')2//2:$//6(783$1'86$*(

,16758&7,216,17+($33/,&$%/(86(5*8,'(6$1'25

0$18$/6,)<28)$,/72'2627+,6'$9352'8&70$<

127)81&7,213523(5/<$1'<280$<68))(5'$0$*(

7+,6:$55$17<:,//127&29(5$1<6(59,&(7+$7,6

5(48,5(',13$5725,1:+2/($6$5(68/72)$1<

)$,/85(72)2//2:7+(6(783$1'86$*(

,16758&7,2167+,6:$55$17<'2(6127$33/<$1'

6+$//%(92,'$1'81(1)25&($%/(,)7+('$9

352'8&7,623(1('6(59,&('255(3$,5('%<

3(5621627+(57+$17+26($87+25,=('%<7&/72

6(59,&(255(3$,57+('$9352'8&7

727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('%</$:$//27+(5

(;35(66$1',03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'

5(35(6(17$7,216)257+,6'$9352'8&7,1&/8',1*

7+(,03/,(':$55$17,(6$1'&21',7,2162)

0(5&+$17$%,/,7<$1'),71(66)25$3$57,&8/$5

385326($5(+(5(%<',6&/$,0('$1'(;&/8'('

,)7+($33/,&$%/(/$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(

35(&/8'(67+((;&/86,212)$1<,03/,('

:$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'5(35(6(17$7,216

7+(168&+,03/,(':$55$17,(6&21',7,216$1'

5(35(6(17$7,216$5(27+(5:,6(/,0,7(',1

'85$7,21727+(7(502)7+,6(;35(66:5,77(1

/,0,7(':$55$17<727+((;7(1712735(&/8'('

%</$:67$78725<2527+(5:,6(7+,6:5,77(1

:$55$17<683(5&('(6$1'63(&,),&$//<',6&/$,06

$1<27+(5:$55$17<&21',7,21255(35(6(17$7,21

12767$7(',17+,6:$55$17<:+(7+(50$'(%<

7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V

$1'$63V$1':+(7+(50$'(25$//<25,1:5,7,1*

,1&/8',1*$1<67$7(0(17,1$1<%52&+85(35(66

5(/($6($11281&(0(17$'9(57,6(0(1732,172)

6$/(',63/$<(7&

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 101E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 101 2009/12/14 18:34:142009/12/14 18:34:14

1

02

EN

LIMITED WARRANTY

,)7+('$9352'8&7)$,/672:25.$6:$55$17('$%29(

<28562/($1'(;&/86,9(5(0('<6+$//%(5(3$,525

5(3/$&(0(172)7+('()(&7,9(3$57,112(9(17:,//

7&/726+,%$&25325$7,217+(,5$)),/,$7(6$'5V25

$63V7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6%(/,$%/(72<2825$1<

7+,5'3$57<)25$1<'$0$*(6021(<5(,0%856(0(17

&267625(;3(16(67+,6/,0,7$7,21$33/,(672'$0$*(6

021(<5(,0%856(0(17&267625(;3(16(62)$1<.,1'

:+$762(9(5,1&/8',1*$1<',5(&725,1',5(&7'$0$*(6

'$0$*(723523(57<253(5621/267352),76/267

6$9,1*6,1&219(1,(1&(2527+(563(&,$/,1&,'(17$/

(;(03/$5<25&216(48(17,$/'$0$*(6:+(7+(5)25

%5($&+2):$55$17<%5($&+2)&2175$&77257

,1&/8',1*1(*/,*(1&(81'(5$67$787(2581'(5$1<

27+(5/$:25)25025$&7,2125:+(7+(5$5,6,1*287

2)7+(86(2)25,1$%,/,7<7286(7+('$9352'8&7

(9(1,)$1<2)7+(5(/$7('3$57,(6+$6%((1$'9,6('2)

7+(3266,%,/,7<2)68&+'$0$*(6252)$1<&/$,0%<

$1<27+(53$57<

1RSHUVRQDJHQWGLVWULEXWRUGHDOHURUFRPSDQ\LVDXWKRUL]HGWR

FKDQJHPRGLI\RUH[WHQGWKHWHUPVRIWKHVHZDUUDQWLHVLQDQ\

PDQQHUZKDWVRHYHU

$UELWUDWLRQDQG'LVSXWH5HVROXWLRQ

7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZDQ\FODLPGLVSXWH

FRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWZKHWKHUIRUEUHDFKRIZDUUDQW\

EUHDFKRIFRQWUDFWWRUWLQFOXGLQJQHJOLJHQFHXQGHUDVWDWXWH

RUXQGHUDQ\RWKHUODZRUIRUPRIDFWLRQDJDLQVWDQ\RIWKH

5HODWHG3DUWLHVDULVLQJRXWRIRURWKHUZLVHUHODWLQJWRLWKLV

ZDUUDQW\LLWKH'$93URGXFWLLLDQ\RUDORUZULWWHQUHSUHVHQWDWLRQV

VWDWHPHQWVEURFKXUHVSUHVVUHOHDVHVDGYHUWLVLQJDQQRXQFHPHQW

SRLQWRIVDOHGLVSOD\RUSURPRWLRQDOPDWHULDOUHODWLQJWRWKH'$9

3URGXFWLYWKHUHODWLRQVKLSVWKDWUHVXOWIURPWKLVZDUUDQW\WKH

IRUHJRLQJFODLPVGLVSXWHVFRQWURYHUVLHVDQGGLVDJUHHPHQWVDUH

FROOHFWLYHO\UHIHUUHGWRDVWKH'LVSXWHVKDOOEHUHIHUUHGWRDQG

UHVROYHGE\ILQDODQGELQGLQJDUELWUDWLRQWRWKHH[FOXVLRQRIWKH

FRXUWV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXDJUHHWRZDLYHDQ\

ULJKWWKDW\RXPD\KDYHWRFRPPHQFHRUSDUWLFLSDWHLQDQ\

UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJDJDLQVWWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHV

UHODWLQJWRDQ\'LVSXWH,IDQGZKHUHDSSOLFDEOHDQGWRWKHH[WHQWQRW

SUHFOXGHGE\ODZ\RXIXUWKHUDJUHHWRRSWRXWRIDQ\VXFK

UHSUHVHQWDWLYHRUFODVVSURFHHGLQJV$UELWUDWLRQRIDQ\'LVSXWHZLOO

EHFRQGXFWHGLQWKHIRUXPDQGLQWKHPDQQHUDVDJUHHGWREHWZHHQ

\RXDQG7&/)DLOLQJVXFKDJUHHPHQWWKHDUELWUDWLRQZLOOEH

FRQGXFWHGE\RQHDUELWUDWRUSXUVXDQWWRWKHODZVDQGUXOHVUHODWLQJ

WRDUELWUDWLRQJHQHUDOO\LQIRUFHLQWKHMXULVGLFWLRQLQZKLFK\RXUHVLGH

DWWKHWLPHWKDWWKH'LVSXWHDULVHV7RWKHH[WHQWQRWSUHFOXGHGE\

ODZQRFODLPGLVSXWHFRQWURYHUV\RUGLVDJUHHPHQWRIDQ\RWKHU

SHUVRQPD\EHMRLQHGRUFRPELQHGZLWKDQ\'LVSXWHE\\RXZLWKRXW

WKHSULRUZULWWHQFRQVHQWRI7&/

&ULWLFDO$SSOLFDWLRQV

7KH'$93URGXFW\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGLVQRWGHVLJQHGIRUDQ\´FULWLFDO

DSSOLFDWLRQVµ´&ULWLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVµPHDQVOLIHVXSSRUWV\VWHPV

PHGLFDODSSOLFDWLRQVFRQQHFWLRQVWRLPSODQWHGPHGLFDOGHYLFHV

FRPPHUFLDOWUDQVSRUWDWLRQQXFOHDUIDFLOLWLHVRUV\VWHPVRUDQ\RWKHU

DSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUH'$93URGXFWIDLOXUHFRXOGOHDGWRLQMXU\WRSHUVRQV



RUORVVRIOLIHRUFDWDVWURSKLFSURSHUW\GDPDJH

,)7+(&86720(586(67+('$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/

$33/,&$7,217+(&86720(5²$1'1277&/,76$)),/,$7(6

$'5V25$63V²$6680(62/($1')8//5(63216,%,/,7<)25

68&+86(7&/5(6(59(67+(5,*+7725()86(726(59,&(

$1<'$9352'8&786(',1$&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,217&/,76

$)),/,$7(6$'5V$1'$63V+(5(%<',6&/$,0$1<$1'$//

/,$%,/,7<'$0$*(6$1'&216(48(1&(6$5,6,1*2872)7+(

6(59,&(255()86$/726(59,&(68&+'$9352'8&7$1'

)857+(5',6&/$,0$1<$1'$///,$%,/,7<&216(48(1&(6$1'

'$0$*(67+$70$<$5,6(255(68/7)5207+(86(2)7+(

'$9352'8&7,1$1<&5,7,&$/$33/,&$7,216

*HQHUDO3URYLVLRQV

,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\

VKRXOGJHQHUDOO\EHIRXQGWREHXQHQIRUFHDEOHWKH

XQHQIRUFHDEOHSURYLVLRQVKDOOEHVHYHUHGIURPWKHZDUUDQW\

DQGGHHPHGQRWWRIRUPSDUWRIWKHZDUUDQW\7KHUHPDLQLQJ

SURYLVLRQVRIWKLVZDUUDQW\VKDOOEHDQGUHPDLQYDOLGDQG

HQIRUFHDEOH,IDQGWRWKHH[WHQWWKDWDQ\SURYLVLRQRIWKLV

OLPLWHGZDUUDQW\DVLWUHODWHVWRDQ\RIWKH5HODWHG3DUWLHVLV

IRXQGWREHLQYDOLGRUXQHQIRUFHDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKDWSDUW\

WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\WKH([FOXGHG3DUW\VKDOOEHGHHPHG

WREHVHYHUHGRUH[FOXGHGIURPWKHSURYLVLRQDQGWKHSURYLVLRQ

VKDOOUHPDLQYDOLGHQIRUFHDEOHDQGDSSOLFDEOHLQUHVSHFWRIWKH

RWKHURUUHPDLQLQJ5HODWHG3DUWLHV

7RWKHH[WHQWSHUPLWWHGE\ODZWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOEH

JRYHUQHGDQGFRQVWUXHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHODZVRI2QWDULR

,IWKHUHLVDQ\LQFRQVLVWHQF\EHWZHHQWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\RQ

WKHRQHKDQGDQGDQ\VWDWHPHQWLQWKHSDFNDJLQJRIWKH'$9

3URGXFWRULQDQ\RWKHUGRFXPHQWHQFORVHGZLWKRUXVHGLQWKH

FRQWH[WRIWKHSURPRWLRQRUVDOHRIWKH'$93URGXFWRQWKH

RWKHUKDQGWKHSURYLVLRQVRIWKLVOLPLWHGZDUUDQW\VKDOOSUHYDLO

+RZWR2EWDLQ:DUUDQW\6HUYLFHV

,IDIWHUIROORZLQJDOORIWKHRSHUDWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWKLVPDQXDO

DQGFKHFNLQJWKH7URXEOHVKRRWLQJVHFWLRQ\RXILQGWKDW

VHUYLFHLVQHHGHG

7RILQGWKHQHDUHVW$63YLVLW7&/·VZHEVLWHDW

ZZZWRVKLEDFDRUFDOOWROOIUHH

3UHVHQW\RXUELOORIVDOHRURWKHUSURRIRISXUFKDVHWRWKH

$63

)RUDGGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQYLVLW7&/VZHEVLWHDWZZZWRVKLEDFD

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 102E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 102 2009/12/14 18:34:152009/12/14 18:34:15

103

EN

Disc

Management Recording PlaybackIntroduction Connections Basic Setup Editing Function Setup Others

MEMO

E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 103E7PEAUD_DR430KU_EN.indd 103 2009/12/14 18:34:152009/12/14 18:34:15

Toshiba Dvd Recorder Dr430 Owners Manual Use And Care

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation